You are on page 1of 322

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide


Release: 18.0 PC2 Document Revision: 18.03

www.nortel.com

411-9001-051 .

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Release: 18.0 PC2 Publication: 411-9001-051 Document release date: 22 January 2010 Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved. While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks. Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, and Microsoft Windows Vista are the property of Microsoft Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Contents
New in this release
Features 9 Abis over IP on BTS6000/BTS9000/BTS18000 (34966) 9 Abis over IP on BTS S8000/S12000 (34967) 9

Introduction Chapter 1 On-site maintenance


1.1 On-site maintenance 13 1.1.1 Introduction 13 1.1.2 Features and functions 13 1.2 On-site maintenance terminal 14 1.2.1 Overview 14 1.2.2 Hardware features 14 1.2.3 Software features 16 1.2.4 Man-machine communication 17 1.3 Software release 17

11 13

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC


2.1 Introduction 19 2.2 BTS operating mode for test runs 19 2.2.1 Start-up configuration in standalone mode 19 2.2.2 Start-up configuration in connected mode 19 2.3 TIL RTC installation 20 2.3.1 From floppy disks 20 2.3.2 From CD-ROM 27 2.3.3 TIL RTC uninstallation 29 2.4 TIL RTC 30 2.4.1 Presentation 30 2.4.2 Launching and quitting the TIL applications 35 2.4.3 TIB test capabilities 50 2.4.4 TIF test capabilities 53 2.5 TIB functions in connected mode 54 2.5.1 Display the board state 56 2.5.2 Display the PROM markings 57

19

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4 2.5.3 Obtain the TEI value 58 2.5.4 Display the alarm input state of an ALAT board 60 2.5.5 Display the TX and CCT states 65 2.5.6 Isolate temporarily the TX 66 2.5.7 Configure a TX in test mode 69 2.5.8 Cancel a TX disconnection 73 2.5.9 Display the CCT state of a combiner 74 2.5.10 Disconnect temporarily a CCT 75 2.5.11 Initialize a disconnected cavity 76 2.5.12 Cancel a CCT disconnection 77 2.5.13 Display the switching matrix 78 2.5.14 Obtain some information on an equipment 81 2.5.15 Display the TX and CCT alarm states 83 2.5.16 Display the TX state 89 2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode 90 2.6.1 Start up a BTS in standalone mode 93 2.6.2 Display the board state 93 2.6.3 Display the PROM markings 93 2.6.4 Obtain the TEI value 94 2.6.5 Obtain the alarm input state of an ALAT board 94 2.6.6 Check the ALAT output operation 94 2.6.7 Validate the HDLC links of the DCC boards 96 2.6.8 Configure a TX 97 2.6.9 Configure the FH bus 99 2.6.10 Configure the switching matrix 100 2.6.11 Reset a board or a module 101 2.6.12 Validate the continuity of the PCM link 102 2.6.13 Display the switching matrix 105 2.6.14 Display the TX and CCT alarm states 106 2.6.15 Display the CCT state of a combiner 108 2.6.16 Park up the cavities of a combiner 108 2.6.17 Initialize a disconnected cavity 108 2.7 TIF test capabilities 109 2.7.1 Display the board state 111 2.7.2 Display the PROM markings 113 2.7.3 Display the SPU state 114 2.7.4 Display the values of the preprocessing parameters 119 2.7.5 Display and check the decisions made by the preprocessing 2.8 TIF functions in standalone mode 128 2.8.1 Start up the FP in standalone mode 130 2.8.2 Display the board state 131 2.8.3 Display the PROM markings 131 2.8.4 Configure the SDA for a transmission reception test 131 2.8.5 Perform a reception frequency test 133
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

126

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

137

3.1 Introduction 137 3.2 BTS operating mode for test runs 137 3.2.1 Start-up configuration in standalone mode 138 3.2.2 Start-up configuration in connected mode 138 3.3 TIL COAM installation 138 3.3.1 From floppy disks 138 3.3.2 From CD-ROM 139 3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 141 3.4.1 Presentation 141 3.4.2 Launching and quitting the TIL applications 142 3.4.3 Operation of the TIL COAM 158 3.4.4 TIL COAM general documentation principles 167 3.4.5 Graphic display of the cabinet 168 3.4.6 TIL COAM functions in connected and/or standalone mode 170 3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes 180 3.5.1 Display the BIST results 189 3.5.2 Display the markings 192 3.5.3 Display the I and C configuration 193 3.5.4 Display the TEI 193 3.5.5 Display the switching matrix 195 3.5.6 Display the BIST results of the CSWM board 197 3.5.7 Display the markings of the CSWM board 198 3.5.8 Display the switching matrix 199 3.5.9 Display the TEI 200 3.5.10 Display the BIST results of the DSC board 202 3.5.11 Display the markings of the DSC board 203 3.5.12 Display the alarm state of the DSC board 203 3.5.13 Display the BIST results of the SYNC board 204 3.5.14 Display the markings of the SYNC board 205 3.5.15 Display the alarm state of the SYNC board 205 3.5.16 Display the STATUS results of the GTW board 206 3.5.17 Display the markings of the GTW board 207 3.5.18 Display the GTW Visualization 207 3.5.19 Display the PCMI alarms 209 3.5.20 Display the BIST results of the PCMI boards 210 3.5.21 Display the markings of the PCMI boards 211 3.5.22 Display the parameters of the PCMI boards 211 3.5.23 Display the alarm state 212 3.5.24 Display the BIST results of the RECAL or ALCO boards 218 3.5.25 Display the markings of the RECAL or ALCO boards 219 3.5.26 Display the alarm state of the ABM board 220

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

6 3.5.27 Display the BIST results of the ABM board 221 3.5.28 Display the markings of the ABM board 223 3.5.29 Display the alarm state of the RM/MRM/TDMA 224 3.5.30 Display the BIST results of the RM/MRM/TDMA board 224 3.5.31 Display the markings of the RM/MRM board 226 3.5.32 Display the BIST results of the TX 227 3.5.33 Display the BIST results of the AMNU 228 3.5.34 Display the BIST results of the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 229 3.5.35 Display the state and the alarms of the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 231 3.5.36 Display the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 markings 233 3.5.37 Check the reception 233 3.5.38 Display the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 state and its sensitivity 234 3.5.39 Configure the cavities 234 3.5.40 Display the CC8 markings 237 3.5.41 Display the CLK status 239 3.5.42 Battery Remote Maintenance and Status Monitoring 239 3.5.43 Display a global inventory 244 3.6 Available functions in connected mode only 245 3.6.1 Disconnect the SYNC board 247 3.6.2 Connect the SYNC board 248 3.6.3 Disconnect a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 248 3.6.4 Connect a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 248 3.6.5 Display the SPU state of a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 249 3.6.6 Disconnect a TDMA board 252 3.6.7 Connect a TDMA board 252 3.6.8 Display the SPU state of a TDMA board 253 3.6.9 Display Radio Configuration 255 3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only 259 3.7.1 Configure the BTS parameters 262 3.7.2 Test the DSC boards 263 3.7.3 Restart the DSC board 264 3.7.4 Restart the SYNC board 264 3.7.5 Restart the GTW board 264 3.7.6 Test the external PCM loopback 265 3.7.7 Restart a PCM interface board 265 3.7.8 Restart a RECAL or ALCO board 265 3.7.9 Test PCM of one DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 266 3.7.10 Reset a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 266 3.7.11 Test the external PCM loopback of an ICM board 267 3.7.12 Reset an ABM board 267 3.7.13 Reset an RM/MRM board 267 3.7.14 Test PCM of one TDMA 268 3.7.15 Configure a TX 268
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

7 3.7.16 3.7.17 3.7.18 3.7.19 Configure a TX in TCH mode 270 Stop the PA (ePA) transmission 271 Loopback PCM 271 Test the external PCM 271

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server


4.1 Introduction 273 4.1.1 IPM configuration and connection 273 4.2 Operating mode 274 4.2.1 Presentation 274 4.3 Launching and quitting the IPM TML application 278 4.3.1 Starting an IPM session in stand-alone local mode 279 4.3.2 Ending a stand-alone mode 279 4.3.3 Starting an IPM TML session in connected local mode 280 4.3.4 Starting an IPM TML session in remote mode 280 4.4 IPM hardware commissioning 281 4.4.1 Commissioning principles 282 4.4.2 Parameters modification management 283 4.4.3 Parameters validity checks 283 4.5 IPM web server functions in stand-alone mode 284 4.5.1 Perform PCM loop test 284 4.5.2 Perform Oscillator test 284 4.6 IPM web server functions in connected mode 285 4.6.1 Display commissioning parameters 285 4.6.2 Modify commissioning parameters 285 4.6.3 Display alarm status 285 4.6.4 Display core/ambient temperature 287 4.6.5 Display counters 287 4.6.6 Display marking 287 4.6.7 Displaying results of built-in self test 288 4.6.8 Reset IPM 288 4.6.9 Reset Ethernet switch 290 4.6.10 Ping IP address 291 4.7 IPM commissioning parameters 291 4.7.1 Parameters control 298 4.7.2 IP parameters 298 4.7.3 IBOS parameters 299 4.8 IPM counters 301

273

Appendix A TCP/IP driver installation procedure


A.1 TCP/IP driver installation procedure for Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista A.1.1 Mandatory Installation Prerequisites 305 A.1.2 Action 305 305

305

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure


B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000 B.1.1 Mandatory prerequisites 307 B.1.2 Restrictions 307 B.1.3 Procedure 308 307

307

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

New in this release


The following section describe what is new in this release for Nortel GSM BTS S8006 Troubleshooting (411-9001-051) for V18.0 P&C 2 release.

Features

Features

See the following paragraph for information about changes related to Abis over IP feature. This feature impacts the following sections:

Abis over IP on BTS6000/BTS9000/BTS18000 (34966) Abis over IP on BTS S8000/S12000 (34967)

Abis over IP on BTS6000/BTS9000/BTS18000 (34966)


This feature allows a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, BTS 12000, or BTS 18000 to connect to the BSC using an Abis interface that runs over a packetized IP network. This feature impacts the following sections:

Modified 1.2.1 Overview (page 14) Modified 4.1 Introduction (page 273) Added Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server (page 273)

Abis over IP on BTS S8000/S12000 (34967)


This feature allows an S8000 BTS or an S12000 BTS to connect to the BSC using an Abis interface that runs over a packetized IP network.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

10 New in this release

This feature impacts the following sections:

Modified 1.2.1 Overview (page 14) Modified 4.1 Introduction (page 273) Added Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server (page 273)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

11

Introduction
This document describes the on-site maintenance for BTS (Base Transceiver Station).

Prerequisites
The reader may consider the following NTPs: Nortel GSM BSS Documentation Roadmap (411-9001-000) Nortel GSM BSS Overview (411-9001-001) Nortel GSM BTS S8000/S8003 Troubleshooting (411-9001-048) Nortel GSM BTS S2000H/S2000L Troubleshooting (411-9001-049) Nortel GSM BTS S8002 Troubleshooting (411-9001-084) Nortel GSM BTS S8006 Troubleshooting (411-9001-085) Nortel GSM BTS S12000 Troubleshooting (411-9001-144)

Navigation
This document describes the on-site maintenance principles and tools for a BSS.

Chapter 1 On-site maintenance (page 13) introduces the TML. Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC (page 19) gives a detailed description of the TIL RTC tool for the maintenance of the S2000 and S4000 BTS without the DCU4 board. Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM (page 137) gives a detailed description of the TIL COAM tool for the S2000 H/L, S12000, S8000 (CBCF or CSWM), S8002, S8003, and S8006 BTS maintenance and BTS6000, BTS 8000, and BTS18000 support. Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server (page 273) gives a detailed description of the TML IPM web server.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

12 Introduction

Appendix A TCP/IP driver installation procedure (page 305) gives the TCP/IP driver installation procedure. Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure (page 307) gives the LayGo driver installation procedure.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

13

Chapter 1 On-site maintenance


1.1 On-site maintenance
1.1.1 Introduction
Within a global GSM 900, GSM 1800, or GSM 1900 network, the major part of Base Station Subsystem maintenance activities are centralized at the OMC-R, as defined in CCITT recommendations. In some cases, however, the information required by maintenance teams cannot be centralized and the operator needs to perform procedures that the OMC-R does not support. On-site BSS maintenance, therefore, refers to all the operations undertaken outside the OMC-R through a local maintenance terminal, called the TML, connected to one of the following:

BSC or a BSC 3000 BTS TCU or a TCU 3000 OMC-R through the public switched network

1.1.2 Features and functions


On-site maintenance provides a set of functions that give the operator information on the state of BSS elements that is not always available at the OMC-R level.

1.1.2.1 S2000H/L, S8000 (with CBCF or CSWM), S8002, S8003, S8006 or S12000 BTS
On-site S2000 H/L, S8000, S8006, S8002, S8003 and S12000 BTS maintenance and BTS6000, BTS9000, and BTS18000 support is performed with a single tool: the TIL COAM. Principles underlying BTS maintenance These tools (TIL RTC, TIL DCU4, TIL COAM) can be used on-line (connected mode) or in stand-alone mode (not connected).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

14 Chapter 1 On-site maintenance

1.2 On-site maintenance terminal


1.2.1 Overview
Maintenance operations are performed on-site through a special terminal, called the TML, which uses specific tools for each functional entity (see Figure 1 "On-site maintenance terminal" (page 15)). A hardware device (PC) and a dedicated package of boards, software, and cables support the complete tool set. The tool set includes the following:

BTS on-site maintenance terminal (TIL COAM) for S2000 H/L BTS, and S12000, S8000 (CSWM or CBCF), S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, and S8006 BTS and support for BTS6000, BTS9000 and BTS18000

The laptop PC terminal tested is

DELL Latitude XPi CD

A test is necessary to check any other PC terminals.

1.2.2 Hardware features 1.2.2.1 Basic PC configuration


The basic hardware configuration of the laptop PC used for tests is as follows:

pentium processor 64 Mb of the RAM appropriate Windows version:

for TIL_RTC or TIL_COAM, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or


Windows Vista

for TIL_DCU4, Windows 2000 or Windows Vista ATTENTION


The TIL_DCU4 is not compatible with Windows XP.

540 Mb or upper hard disk drive 1.44 Mb floppy 3.5" disk drive VGA type color monitor CD-ROM drive

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

1.2 On-site maintenance terminal Figure 1 On-site maintenance terminal

15

1.2.2.2 TIL terminal configuration


TIL COAM (TIL for S2000H/L, S12000, S8000, S8002, S8003 and S8006 BTS) The PC must be configured with TCP/IP protocol. The TIL configuration contains the following:

basic configuration previously described

for S12000, S8000, S8002, S8003 and S8006 BTS kit (ref: NTQA70HA) composed of an Etherlink III board and a cross male RJ 45 cable (ref: NTQA70HB)

for S2000 H/L "FP" BTS

Etherlink III board (Etherlink III LAN PC board - 3COM - ref: 3C589C-TP) delivered with its adaptation cord for connection through a network (female RJ45) cable test (SubD 26 pts to male RJ45 8pts - ref: NTQA2389)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

16 Chapter 1 On-site maintenance

for S2000 H/L "EP" BTS

Etherlink III board (Etherlink III LAN PC board - 3COM - ref: 3C589C-TP) delivered with its adaptation cord for connection through a network (female RJ45) cable test (AMP 26 pts to male RJ45 8pts - ref: NTQA2371)

Figure 2 Pin connections of the TIL S2000 H/L cable

1.2.3 Software features 1.2.3.1 PC basic configuration


The basic laptop PC software configuration contains the following:

DOS operating system, version 6.2 or above PCMCIA V2.01 driver, including PCMCIA boards management (board services: PCMCIA socket services and resources allocation)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

1.3 Software release

17

1.2.3.2 PC application configuration


The laptop PC software application is the following:

maintenance software for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, and S12000 BTS and support for BTS6000, BTS9000, and BTS18000 (TIL COAM)

TIL for all BTS All of these TILs operate in the Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Vista environment (TIL DCU4 is not compatible with Windows XP). These tools require the following configuration, in addition to the configuration requirements given above:

Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Vista operating system Microsoft 32 bits TCP/IP driver (Ref: 261-050-020A)

The installation of the Windows program group necessary to launch TIL is done during TILs installation.

1.2.4 Man-machine communication


The TIL RTC, the TIL COAM, and the TIL DCU4 have a dedicated graphic interface. The applications are accessed through a program group in the Windows environment. An application is launched by clicking on the appropriate icon. The main features are as follows:

program group containing the icons to launch the following applications:

S2000 H/L, S12000, S8000 (CBCF or CSWM), S8002, S8003, and


S8006 BTS on-site maintenance

specific S2000 H/L, S12000, S8000 (CBCF or CSWM), S8002, and S8003 BTS MMI

1.3 Software release


The on-site maintenance terminal is delivered on a set of 3.5", 1.44 Mb format diskettes or on a CD-ROM. All of the TIL BTS applications can be installed separately.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

18 Chapter 1 On-site maintenance

The set of diskettes contains the following:

one diskette for each language for the TIL RTC one diskette for each language for the TIL DCU4 one diskette for the TIL COAM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

19

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC


2.1 Introduction
The TIL checks BTS equipment and pinpoints a certain number of hardware problems. The TIL RTC operates in the DOS environment under Windows 98, NT, or Vista operating system. It is built around two entities:

TIB application part to test and check the BCF (TIL BCF) TIF application part to test and check FPRX (TIL FP)

2.2 BTS operating mode for test runs


The BTS can perform tests in two modes:

standalone connected (on-line)

The TIL detects the available connection by talking to the BTS.

2.2.1 Start-up conguration in standalone mode


The BTS disregards the Abis interface in standalone mode and is cut off from the PCM link that connects it to the BSC, or the signaling link between BTS and BSC cannot be established. The operator has to restart the BTS as a whole after tests have been executed and the TIL disconnected.

2.2.2 Start-up conguration in connected mode


The BTS is connected to the BSC. The BCF (btsSiteManager object) and the FPs (transceiverEquipment objects) are downloaded. In connected mode, the TIL does not disturb BTS operations.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

20 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.3 TIL RTC installation


The TIL RTC installation is possible from:

floppy disks: see 2.3.1 From floppy disks (page 20) CD-ROM: see 2.3.2 From CD-ROM (page 27)

2.3.1 From oppy disks


TIL RTC for Windows 98, NT, or Vista is supplied as a set of two floppies. One set is for the installation in English and the other set is for the installation in French. These floppies are marked:

English/French disk 1 English/French disk 2

Perform the following steps to install the TIL RTC: Insert the disk 1 into the floppy disk drive. Open the floppy disk folder. Run the setup.exe program file. A logo window appears. The installation window Setup temporarily displays.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 TIL RTC installation Figure 3 Setup window

21

When 100% is reached, the following screen is automatically displayed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

22 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 4 Til rtc setup window

If you click the Close button, the following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 TIL RTC installation Figure 5 Exit setup window

23

click the Exit setup button to stops the installation program. click the Resume button to go back to the previous screen.

In Figure 4 "Til rtc setup window" (page 22), click the Next button to start the TIL RTC installation. Then the user is prompted to insert the "disk 2" into the floppy disk drive. Ensure that you insert the correct version of the disk (French or English).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

24 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 6 Setup needs the Next Disk window

During the installation, the following screen appears showing the progressing setup:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 TIL RTC installation Figure 7 TIL RTC progressing setup

25

The following screen appears when the installation is finished:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

26 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 8 Setup Complete window

Click the Finish button to exit the installation program.

If you have used the install.lnk file for installation, the following message appears during the uninstallation of the previous version.

The TIL RTC application is installed in the following directory: \Program Files\Nortel Networks\BTS tools\Til rtc\

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 TIL RTC installation

27

When the TIL RTC is successfully installed, select the Start menu and then Programs/Tml/BTS tools/ Til rtc Vxxxxxx /TIL BCF to launch the TIL BCF application or select Start/Programs/Tml/BTS tools/ Til rtc Vxxxxxx /TIL FP to launch the TIL FP application.
Figure 9 TIL RTC access menus

2.3.2 From CD-ROM


Perform the following steps to install the TIL RTC:

Insert the CD-ROM in the drive. Open the Explorer window of the Start/Programs menu. Select the CD-ROM repertory. Open the Tmltools repertory. Select the Setup.exe file and double click. The installation window "Set up" of the TML tools temporarily displays:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

28 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 10 Setup window

followed by a window with the version of the TML: V12xx.xx.

Wait for the display of the Installation window.

Figure 11 Installation window (RTC-DOS versus RTC-Windows)

By default all the TML tools are selected.

Select the language: Franais-French. Select the Clear All button to deselect all the products. Select the TIL RTC choice (and put a cross in front of the "TIL RTC Windows" option if you want a Windows 32-bit TIL MMI), then the Install button to start only the TIL RTC installation.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.3 TIL RTC installation

29

The TIL RTC Set up screen displays. Wait for the display of the Setup Complete window.

Figure 12 Setup Complete window

Select the Finish button to complete the installation. Check in the Start/Programs/Tml menu that the TIL RTC V12xxxx short cut is present. Check also the presence of the associated icon on the desktop.

The installation procedure is completed.

2.3.3 TIL RTC uninstallation


To uninstall the TIL application, select the Start menu, and then Programs/Tml/BTS tools/ Til rtc Vxxxxxx /Uninstall Til rtc. The following message box appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

30 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 13 Confirm File Deletion window

Click the Yes button to uninstall TIL RTC application. Click the No button to cancel the uninstallation.

2.4 TIL RTC


2.4.1 Presentation 2.4.1.1 PC configuration
The PC configuration must be adapted for TIL use with a PCMCIA board. The TIL has been tested on a DELL Latitude XPi with the following equipment:

One for the V11 link (PCMC525 board from NORTEL in the DOS environment or RS-422/485 synchronous type II PCMCIA board from NORTEL in the Windows 98/NT/XP/Vista environment). This board must be used in a TYPE II slot. One for the modem link (SLIMFAX CM2496 from TOSHIBA).

2.4.1.2 External interface


A V11 HLDC secured link at 64Kbit/s interfaces the PC and active CSW1 and MNU boards. This link is used for messages exchanged by the PC and BTS, through the RTC++ kernel installed in the different processors. A synchronous HDLC board serves as an interface. The TIB and TIF user interfaces are identical. The TIB and TIF interface This interface supports two types of display:

screen displays for selecting a function or typing parameters result displays

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

31

Figure 14 "TIB/TIF-DOS screen interface" (page 31) and Figure 15 "TIB/TIF-Windows screen interface" (page 31) show a typical TIB/TIF test selection display.
Figure 14 TIB/TIF-DOS screen interface

Figure 15 TIB/TIF-Windows screen interface

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

32 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Each test function is displayed on one line with the following:

letter to access to the function description of the function

Buttons, keyboard and special functions Direct selection The test to be performed can be selected by pressing the matching letter on the keyboard followed by <cr>(carriage return) or click the line you want to select.
Figure 16 TIL RTC DOS windows

Using the selection bar A test can also be performed by moving the selection bar onto the chosen option using the arrows do keys on the number pad and pressing <cr> when desired the function is selected. Using the buttons Click the OK button to perform the selected test.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

33

Click the Close button to close the window. Stopping a test Use the <esc> key to stop the test and return to the main menu. Browsing screen pages When a screen (usually a results screen) includes a number of pages, use the <PgDn> and <PgUp> keys to browse the pages or click the screen you want to appear on the foreground. Concerning the windows interface

Click <OK> to validate the data or to execute the request Click <cr> as the same effects as clicking <OK> Click <Close> or <Cancel> to cancel the action and/or close the opened window Click the <Tab> key to move from one edited field to an other In a list box, use the scroll bar to go up and down In a list box or in a drop-down list box, click the item you want to select Double click the request you want to execute

You can navigate in the screen by clicking in the field you want to edit.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

34 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 17 TIL RTC Windows screens

2.4.1.3 Result tracing


Each software part provides trace files. They are used to record the results obtained from measurement test runs. For BCF tests, the file is called TIL_BCF.RES. For FP tests, the software detects the FP identifier (TEI) and the file name is automatically tailored to match the FP rank. For example, for FP0 tests, the trace file name is TIL_FP32.RES: for FP3 tests, it is TIL_FP35.RES. All the files are ASCII files and can be edited and printed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

35

The directory containing these files is the following: "BTS_TIL\P9\Vxxxxxx\ TIB_TIF\" where Vxxxxxx is the TIL version.

2.4.2 Launching and quitting the TIL applications 2.4.2.1 Launching and quitting TIB
In standalone mode Starting up In this description, <cr> stands for the "carriage return" key on the PC, <esc> stands for the "escape" key, <OK> stands for the OK button in the opened window, <Cancel> stands for the Cancel button, <Close> stands for the Close button, and the terms in bold print are typed in or selected by the user. To launch the TIB application in standalone mode, proceed as follows:

Switch off the BTS. Disconnect the Abis interface by removing all the jumpers on the front panel (if the PCM is free) with the terminator in the LP position on DTI boards. Switch on the BTS power supply units A (first) and B. Connect the PC to the BTS using the cable to link the synchronous HDLC board on the PC and the "LOC TERM" port on the active CSW1 board ("ON" LED is lit), then switch on the TML. Start the PC: Windows is automatically launched. Click the Start/Programs menu of Windows. From "Tml" program group, select the TIL BTS, TIL RTC, Vxxxxxx menus. Click the TIL BCF application: the main TIB screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

36 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 18 Main TIB menu in standalone mode (DOS)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

37

Figure 19 Main TIB menu in standalone mode (Windows)

Enter the following command on the main TIB screen: A <cr> or click <OK> (to restart the BCF in test mode)

TIB waits for the connection between the PC and BCF to be set up. When the connection is established, TIB waits for SYN modules to synchronize. If the PC fails to connect to the BCF, proceed as follows:

Identify the active chain (CSW1 board "ON" led lit on the active side) and connect TIB to the master board. Press <esc> to return to the main menu. Press <A> then <cr> to restart the BCF or click <OK>. When the connection with the BCF is established, TIB waits for the SYN modules to synchronize before initializing the TX in the cabinet. To cut down on waiting time, press <cr> to lock the SYN modules.

TIB shadows the TX initialization routine and informs the user.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

38 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 20 End of TX initialization routine (DOS)

Press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIB menu (see Figure 18 "Main TIB menu in standalone mode (DOS)" (page 36) and Figure 19 "Main TIB menu in standalone mode (Windows)" (page 37)). Quitting To quit TIB, proceed as follows:

Press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the TIB application screen from any test screen. Execute the following command from the main screen: Q <cr> or click <OK> according to the interface type (to quit TIB and return to the main TML menu)

To disconnect the TIB from the CSW1 board proceed as follows:

Switch off the BTS (power supply units, A and B). Connect the Abis interface by resetting the jumpers on front DTI panels in their normal position. Switch on the BTS (power supply unit B then A).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

39

In connected mode Starting up In this description, <cr> stands for the "carriage return" key on the PC, <esc> stands for the "escape" key, <OK> stands for the OK button in the opened window, <Cancel> stands for the Cancel button, <Close> stands for the Close button and the terms in bold print are typed in or selected by the user. The BTS starts up normally. The BSC downloads the BCF then the FP. To launch TIB in connected mode, proceed as follows:

Connect the PC to the BTS using the cable to link the synchronous HDLC board on the PC and the "LOC TERM" port on the active CSW1 board (active board "ON" and "RDY" LEDs are lit), switch on the PC. Start the PC: Windows is automatically launched. Click the Start/Programs menu of Windows. From "Tml" program group, select the TIL BTS, TIL RTC, Vxxxxx menus. Click the TIL BCF application. The main TIB screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

40 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 21 TIB connected mode menu

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

41

Figure 22 Main TIB screen in connected mode (DOS versus Windows)

Quitting To quit TIB, proceed as follows:

Press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the TIB application screen from any test screen. Execute the following command from the main screen: M and <cr> or click <OK> (to quit TIB and return to the main TML menu) Disconnect the TIB from the CSW1 board if necessary.

The TIB wait message A "please wait" message is displayed during TIB exchanges with the BCF to inform users that the selection has been accepted and not to disconnect TIB from the BCF.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

42 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

All the information requests issued by TIB are timed out to guard against connection loss with the BCF (20 seconds).
Figure 23 Launching TIB screen

The TIB error message An error message is displayed in case of BCF link failure for one of the following reasons:

CSW switchover cable not connected to the active CSW cable not connected to the synchronous HDLC board and/or the active CSW1 board

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

43

2.4.2.2 Launching and quitting TIF


In standalone mode Starting up In this description, <cr> stands for the "carriage return" key on the PC, <esc> stands for the "escape" key, <OK> stands for the OK button in the opened window, <Cancel> stands for the Cancel button, <Close> stands for the Close button, and the terms in bold print are typed in by the user. To launch the TIF application in standalone mode, proceed as follows:

Connect the PC to the BTS using the cable to link the HDLC board on the PC and the "TEST1" port on the MNU board of the FP to be tested, then switch on the PC. Start the PC: Windows is automatically launched. Click the Start/Programs menu of Windows. From "Tml" program group, select the TIL BTS, TIL RTC, Vxxxxxx menus. Click the TIL FP application. The main TIF screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

44 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 24 Main TIF screen in standalone mode (DOS versus Windows)

Enter the following command on the main TIF screen: A <cr> or click <OK> (to restart the FP in test mode).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

45

While the connection between the PC and FP is being established, TIF waits for SPU self-test software to be downloaded (the message is cleared at the end of downloading)
Figure 25 Please wait message for FP connection (DOS)

When the connection is established, the TIF is ready:


Figure 26 Successful FP connection (DOS)

If the connection with the FP cannot be established the following screen appears: (see Figure 27 "FP connection failure (DOS)" (page 46))

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

46 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 27 FP connection failure (DOS)

Then proceed as follows:

Check that the following apply:

FP is functioning (front panel LED). TIF is properly connected.

Press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main menu. Press the RESET button of MNU board. Press A then <cr> or select A and click <OK> to force a restart.

TIF issues a message when the connection is established. Quitting

Proceed as follows to quit TIF: Press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main application screen from any test screen. Execute the following command sequence from the main screen: F <cr> or F and click <OK> (to quit TIF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

47

Disconnect the PC from the MNU board. Press the RESET button of MNU board.

In connected mode Starting up In this description, <cr> stands for the "carriage return" key, <esc> stands for the "escape" key, <OK> stands for the OK button in the opened window, <Cancel> stands for the Cancel button, <Close> stands for the Close button, and the terms in bold print are typed in by the user. The BTS starts up normally. The BSC downloads the BCF and the FP. To launch TIF in connected mode, proceed as follows:

Connect the PC to the BTS using the cable to link the HDLC board on the PC and the "TEST1" port on the MNU board, then switch on the PC. Start the PC: Windows is automatically launched. Click the Start/Programs menu of Windows. From "Tml" program group, select the TIL BTS, TIL RTC, Vxxxxx menus. Click the TIL FP application.

The main TIF screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

48 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 28 Main TIF screen in connected mode (DOS versus Windows)

Quitting To quit TIF, proceed as follows:

Press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main application screen from any TIF test screen. Execute the following command from the main screen: E <cr> or click <OK> (to quit TIF). Disconnect the PC from the MNU board.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC

49

The TIF wait message A "please wait" message is displayed during TIF exchanges with a FP to inform users that the selection has been accepted and not to disconnect TIF from the FP. All the information requests issued by TIF are timed out to guard against connection loss with the FP (20 seconds).
Figure 29 Launching of TIF screen

The TIF error message An error message is displayed in case of FP link failure for one of the following reasons:

cable not connected to the MNU board cable not connected to the HDLC board and/or MNU board

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

50 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 30 TIF connection failure message

2.4.3 TIB test capabilities 2.4.3.1 TIB working principles


Communication with the BTS Standalone mode The TIB is always connected to the CSW1 board on the BTS "A" chain (CSW pair on the left side of the CSU shelf, LOC TERM port) for tests in STANDALONE mode (see Figure 31 "TIB connection layout" (page 51)). At the end of STANDALONE tests, the BTS must be shut down and switched on again (including the TX). Connected mode In CONNECTED mode, the TIB is connected to the active CSW1 board ("ON" and "RDY" LEDs on). Never disconnect the TIB during test runs or before they normally end.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC Figure 31 TIB connection layout

51

Communication and access to modules Communication with BCF entities is established through the BTS O&M bus (see Nortel GSM BTS S4000/S4000C Indoor Fundamentals (411-9001-003), Nortel GSM BTS S4000 Outdoor Fundamentals (411-9001-023), and < 53 >). The following entities are addressed by the TIB:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

52 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

SYN units TX modules CCT modules all boards in the CSU shelf ALAT boards

TIB communication Since the TIB communicates with other entities across the O&M bus operating at 9600 b/s, any requests sent on the bus in response to operator actions (board status requests, alarm status, etc.) take some time. The TIB informs the operator by the message "Please wait ...", at the bottom of the screen while the information is being collected. A screenful of collected data is then displayed. If an error is detected, the TIB displays a fault context message (wrong board number, wrong TX number, mistake in input parameter syntax, etc.). To escape a fault context, press <esc>. This applies to all TIB operations. Operator action times Some modules must be reset (takes about 20 seconds) at the end of certain test runs involving special operations, such as "TX configuration" (transmission test). Wait for the module to be reset before attempting to trigger other operations ("TX status dump", for example) or before repeating a request when a response seems illogical (if, for example, the TX sends a NOK response following a fault-free test run). TIB documentation To simplify the use of the TIB, in this document tests are described in forms with the following information in the header:

TIB test mode (STANDALONE or CONNECTED) test title call sequence

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.4 TIL RTC Figure 32 Test form header

53

2.4.4 TIF test capabilities


The PC is connected to the MNU board of the tested FP (see Figure 33 "Connection layout of the TIF on an FP" (page 54)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

54 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 33 Connection layout of the TIF on an FP

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode


The following functions handle BCF on-site maintenance in connected mode:

board status PROM marking shelf number ALAT alarm readouts TX and CCT status dump TX tests
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

55

CCT tests connection/switching matrix configuration readouts signaling management board alarms status masthead tests TX state

Figure 34 Main TIB menu in connected mode (DOS versus Windows)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

56 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.5.1 Display the board state


Menu: Connected mode Board status A + <cr> or A + <OK>

TEST RESULTS
This test provides the following information:

BIST result (OK or NOK) BIST status in hexadecimal when the BIST result is NOK. The BIST value is not useful for maintenance tests, only the result is important (OK or NOK)

The result field for mute boards is empty (whether present or absent). The active CSW board is displayed in first position (A or B). When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed and refreshed every 10 seconds. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop this test (return to the main TIB application menu).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

57

2.5.2 Display the PROM markings


Menu: Connected mode PROM marking B + <cr> or B + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to display the PROM labels of the following boards and modules:

CSW1 boards (active and standby) boards and slave modules on the O&M bus (DTI, DCC, TX, ALAT, SYN)

TEST RESULTS
There are three result fields:

PROM name version and edition of PROM software date and time of PROM generation

TIB only displays PROM marking of boards that are present. TIB displays a "please wait" message while information is being collected, or until the BCF access is considered "out of service". If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIB application menu. When the information has been stored, the first screenful of results is displayed. Results are displayed on five successive screens. Result screens are organized as follows:

first screen: CSW1, DCC board and SYN module PROM marking second screen: ALAT and DTI board PROM marking third screen: transmitter (TX_0 to TX_11) PROM marking fourth screen: transmitter (TX_12 to TX_23) PROM marking

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

58 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Use the following keys to move from one DOS screen to another:

<page up> to display the previous screen <page down> to display the next screen <cr> to display the next screen

To move from one windows screen to another, click the window you want to appear on the foreground. Press <esc> or <Close> to stop this test (return to the main TIB application menu).

2.5.3 Obtain the TEI value


Menu: Connected mode Shelf number C + <cr> or C + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to obtain the following information:

CSU rack number Rendez-Vous Time Slot BCF Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI)

TEST RESULTS
TIB displays a "please wait" message while the information is being collected, or until the BCF access is considered to be "out of service". When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop this test (return to the main TIB application menu). The value of the Rendez-Vous Time Slot always equals the value of the BCF TEI value plus one. The BCF TEI value is obtained by taking one away from the number of the Rendez-Vous TS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

59

The following formula is used to calculate the CSU rack number (shelf number): Rack number (Hexadecimal) = complement of the four low-order bits in the BCF TEI.

MEANING
Three parameter values are set in the CSU rack:

CSU shelf number BCF rack TEI Rendez-Vous Time Slot

The last two values are derived from the first. Calculating the CSU shelf TEI The TEI number is obtained by calculating the complement of the four low-order CSU rack number bits (XOR with value of 1111 in binary logic). Example: Shelf number =0f; giving 00001111 in binary logic TEI equals: <Shelf number> XOR 1111) = 0000=0 Rendez-Vous Time Slot The Rendez-Vous Time Slot (RV TS) is calculated by adding one to the TEI. RV TS=TEI+1 Example: For a CSU shelf number equaling 0f:

TEI = 00 Rendez-Vous Time Slot = TEI+1=1

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

60 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.5.4 Display the alarm input state of an ALAT board


Menu: Connected mode ALAT alarms D + <cr> or D + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to obtain the alarm input activation status on a given ALAT board, for example converter alarms (voltage and temperature), fan alarms, external alarms, etc.

OPERATING MODE
Enter the number of the ALAT board to be tested or select it in the pull-down list. Enter X + <cr> (X represents the number of the cabinet housing the ALAT board) or select the alat board type in the pull-down list and click <OK>. TIB checks that the number matches the authorized list. Press <esc> if you enter a wrong number. The following choices are offered when the number matches the list:

ALAT_O MICRO, for S2000 O1 Indoor BTS ALAT COMPACT, for S4000C BTS ALAT_O MICRO INDOOR, for S2000 O2 Indoor BTS ALAT_O MICRO OUTDOOR, for S2000 O2 Outdoor BTS

Select the appropriate option.

TEST RESULTS
When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed. The results are given in binary format:

1 = active alarm or no board 0 = no alarm

Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test (return to the main TIB application menu).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

61

Example: if some TXs are missing (and so are their respective power supplies) an alarm concerning the missing power supplies appears, that is a "1" status. It is the same for the diversity splitter if it is not installed.
S2000 O1 Indoor BTS alarms: BASE CABINET Alarm mnemonic ORALPWS SPL_FAL0 SPLD_FAL1 EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 ORALFANS DOORS_B Comments OR Power supply units Splitter 0 alarm Diversity splitter 0 alarm External alarm 0 External alarm 1 External alarm 2 External alarm 3 OR fan units Open cover alarm S4000C BTS alarms: BASE CABINET Alarm mnemonic SWR_ANT1 SWR_DUPLX V_CONVA0 T_CONVA0 V_CONVA1 T_CONVA1 V_CONVA2 T_CONVA2 V_CONVA3 T_CONVA3 SPLIT_0 SPLIT_1 V_CONVB0 T_CONVB0 V_CONVB1 T_CONVB1 VENT_TX0 VENT_TX1 VENT_TX2 Not significant Not significant FP0 A type power supply voltage alarm FP0 A type power supply temperature alarm FP1 A type power supply voltage alarm FP1 A type power supply temperature alarm FP2 A type power supply voltage alarm FP2 A type power supply temperature alarm FP3 A type power supply voltage alarm FP3 A type power supply temperature alarm Splitter 0 alarm Splitter 1 alarm FP0 B type power supply voltage alarm FP0 B type power supply temperature alarm FP1 B type power supply voltage alarm FP1 B type power supply temperature alarm TX0 fan alarm TX1 fan alarm TX2 fan alarm Comments

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

62 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

S4000C BTS alarms: BASE CABINET Alarm mnemonic VENT_TX3 VENT_RX0 VENT_RX1 VENT_RX2 VENT_RX3 EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 TX3 fan alarm RX0 fan alarm RX1 fan alarm RX2 fan alarm RX3 fan alarm External Alarm 0 External Alarm 1 External Alarm 2 External Alarm 3 S4000C BTS: EXTENSION CABINET Alarm mnemonic SWR_ANT1 SWR_DUPLX V_CONVA0 T_CONVA0 V_CONVA1 T_CONVA1 V_CONVA2 T_CONVA2 V_CONVA3 T_CONVA3 SPLIT_0 SPLIT_1 SPLIT_2 SPLIT_3 V_CONVB0 T_CONVB0 V_CONVB1 T_CONVB1 VENT_TX0 VENT_TX1 VENT_TX2 VENT_TX3 Not significant Not significant FP0 A type power supply voltage alarm FP0 A type power supply temperature alarm FP1 A type power supply voltage alarm FP1 A type power supply temperature alarm FP2 A type power supply voltage alarm FP2 A type power supply temperature alarm FP3 A type power supply voltage alarm FP3 A type power supply temperature alarm Splitter 0 alarm Splitter 1 alarm Splitter 2 alarm Splitter 3 alarm FP0 B type power supply voltage alarm FP0 B type power supply temperature alarm FP1 B type power supply voltage alarm FP1 B type power supply temperature alarm TX0 fan alarm TX1 fan alarm TX2 fan alarm TX3 fan alarm Comments Comments

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

63

S4000C BTS: EXTENSION CABINET Alarm mnemonic VENT_RX0 VENT_RX1 VENT_RX2 VENT_RX3 EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 RX0 fan alarm RX1 fan alarm RX2 fan alarm RX3 fan alarm External Alarm 0 External Alarm 1 External Alarm 2 External Alarm 3 S2000 O2 Indoor BTS alarms: BASE CABINET Alarm mnemonic ORALPWS SPL_FAL0_B EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 ORALFANS DOORS_B Comments 24V, 5V radio, 12V radio, -12V radio power supplies (OR alarm) Splitter 0 alarm External alarm 0 External alarm 1 External alarm 2 External alarm 3 OR on fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 Door open detection S2000 O2 Indoor BTS alarms: EXTENSION CABINET Alarm mnemonic ORALPWS SPL_FAL0_E EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 ORALFANS DOORS_E Comments 24V, 5V radio, 12V radio, -12V radio power supplies (OR alarm) Splitter 0 alarm External alarm 0 External alarm 1 External alarm 2 External alarm 3 OR on fans 1, 2, 3 and 4 Door open detection S2000 O2 Outdoor BTS alarms: BASE CABINET Alarm mnemonic ORALPWS Comments OR Power supply units Comments

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

64 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

S2000 O2 Outdoor BTS alarms: BASE CABINET Alarm mnemonic SPL_FAL0_B EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 ORALFANS TMAX_B TMIN_B HGTP_B EXCH_B DOORS_B Spliitter 0 alarm External alarm 0 External alarm 1 External alarm 2 External alarm 3 OR fan units Max temperature threshold Min temperature threshold Cabinet high temperature Heat exchanger Open cover alarm S2000 O2 Outdoor BTS alarms: EXTENSION CABINET Alarm mnemonic ORALPWS SPL_FAL0_E EXT_ALA0 EXT_ALA1 EXT_ALA2 EXT_ALA3 ORALFANS TMAX_E TMIN_E HGTP_E EXCH_E DOORS_E Comments OR Power supply units Spliitter 0 alarm External alarm 0 External alarm 1 External alarm 2 External alarm 3 OR fan units Max temperature threshold Min temperature threshold Cabinet high temperature Heat exchanger Open cover alarm Comments

Some comments need to be detailed:

Mnemonics beginning with ORAL mean a logical OR on power supplies. This alarm indicates that one of the power supplies is faulty. Mnemonics beginning with HGTP indicate that the temperature is higher than the upper threshold. Mnemonics beginning with SWR correspond to nonrelevant alarms. Mnemonics beginning with LINK_FAIL are relevant only if the corresponding option (FH terminal) has been installed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

65

Each splitter alarm beginning with SPL_FAL corresponds to one incoming channel and indicates a difference in current consumption of 30% from the nominal value (120 mA). DC_PROTEC includes all fuses in the cabinet.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIB application menu.

2.5.5 Display the TX and CCT states


Menu: Connected mode TX and CCT status E + <cr> or E + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to display the status of the TX and CCT that equip a BTS. The status indicates, for each TX and CCT present and identified, whether the TX or CCT is out of reach (after isolating the TX or CCT) or in use (normal operating conditions or after the TX has been reset and reconfigured).

ATTENTION
Isolation of a CCT causes isolation of all the associated TXs.

For TXs and CCTs that are not present, the field may be:

NOK, meaning that the TX or the CCT is not present in site configuration definition. empty when the TX or the CCT number exceeds the maximum BTS site configuration. USE, meaning that the TX or the CCT is used. ISO meaning that the TX or the CCT is isolated.

For example, for an O2, TX 0 and 1 are USE (used), or for an ISO (isolated), TX 2 and 3 are NOK and all the other fields are empty.

TEST RESULTS
TIB displays a "please wait" message while the request is executing. In case of BCF link failure, an error message is displayed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

66 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

When all the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed. All the TX and CCT (present or not) are displayed with their status:

ISO (TX or CCT out of reach, not in use) USE (TX or CCT in normal use) NOK (TX or CCT absent or switched off in terms of the maximum configuration and cabinet type) The field is empty (when the TX or CCT are not part of the maximum BTS site configuration)

Two more status can be displayed:

HDW (Hardware fault) FAL (Fault other than hardware fault)

Press <esc> or click <Close> to quit the function and return to the main menu.

2.5.6 Isolate temporarily the TX


Menu: Connected mode TX test -> TX disconnection F + <cr> + 1 + <cr> or F + <OK> + 1 + <OK> Figure 35 TX test

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

67

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to temporarily isolate a TX in order to perform special tests. The TX power supply must be switched off before using this function (associated type A supply). When TX isolation is confirmed, the TX can be powered on.

TEST RESULTS
To select a TX, type in the number as follows: X + <cr> or x + <OK>
Figure 36 Disconnection of one TX

where X is the valid TX number in the following range:

0 to 3: base cabinet 4 to 7: extension 1 8 to 11: extension 2 12 to 15: extension 3 16 to 19: extension 4 20 to 23: extension 5

Extension cabinets are used to increase the number of cells. Expansion cabinets are used to increase the size of a cell. TIB checks whether the number is valid:

If the TX number is wrong, press <esc> or click <Cancel> to stop. If the number is correct, TIB displays the "please wait" message while the request is executing.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

68 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

The TX is temporarily withdrawn from the pool of TXs used by the BTS.
Figure 37 Deconnection of one TX-TX

When the TX has been isolated, TIB displays the following message: Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop and return to the main menu.

ERRORS
TIB issues the following message if the requested TX cannot be isolated:
TX CANNOT BE ISOLATED

The error messages can be as follows:

TX unknown (for the configuration) TX absent TX not disconnected TX not ready CCT not disconnected and not ready CCT disconnected and not ready CCT event

04: the TX doesnt transmit or is absent 05: impossible cavity tuning (SVWR,...) 06: frequencies too close or bad 07: incompatible configuration (another cavity is already tuned for
this frequency)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

69

08: hardware problem 09: communication failure with extension combiner 10: cavity not initialized 12: cavity tuning impossible and cavity parking failed 2.5.7 Congure a TX in test mode
Menu: Connected mode TX test -> TX configuration F + <cr> + 2 + <cr> or F + <OK> + 2 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to configure a TX in a special mode to check its transmission level on a given channel. This procedure can be used in standalone (BTS not working) or connected mode after isolating the TX (see relevant commands). Transmitter output must be correctly charged (antenna or attenuator and charge) to prevent the power amplifier from being destroyed by an SVWR that is too high.

TEST RESULTS
The result gives TX parameter values and transmission. When transmission is confirmed, measurements can be taken.

OPERATING MODE
The TX is in BCCH mode and the cavity which is eventually associated, is tuned. Set up the measuring device on the transmission line and make sure the transmitter is correctly charged. A test bank example is given below.

Power on if isolation has been performed. Enter or select the TX number and press <cr> or click <OK>: For example: <x> + <cr> where x is the TX number. Select one of the following ranges given in the menu:

0 to 3 (Main cabinet) 4 to 7: extension 1


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

70 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

8 to 11: extension 2 12 to 15: extension 3 16 to 19: extension 4 20 to 23: extension 5


TIB compares the number to the authorized list. If the TX number is not in the list, an error message is displayed. Entering the transmission level If the TX number is correct, the transmission level can be entered.

Give or select the output level in dBm and press <cr> or click <OK>.

The power is expressed in dBm, in steps of 2 dB. Enter 43 for maximum power level measurements. TIB compares the number to authorized power levels. An error message is displayed if the value is illegal. Entering the transmission channel If the requested power level is correct, a transmission channel can then be selected.

Enter or select the channel value and press <cr>.

For maximum transmission measurements, a channel corresponding to the middle of the band must be selected (62 for GSM 900, 699 for GSM 1800 and 662 for GSM 1900). TIB compares the value to the list of authorized channels. When TX to be configured receives the information, a message shows that the TX is correctly configured. The TX then starts to transmit. Stopping transmission transmissions. The next operation "Reset" is used to stop

Press <esc> or click <Cancel> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

71

The error messages can be as follows:

TX unknown (for the configuration) TX absent TX not disconnected TX not ready CCT not disconnected and not ready CCT disconnected and not ready CCT event

04: the TX doesnt transmit or is absent 05: impossible cavity tuning (SVWR,...) 06: frequencies too close or bad 07: incompatible configuration (another cavity is already tuned for
this frequency)

08: hardware problem 09: communication failure with extension combiner 10: cavity not initialized 12: cavity tuning impossible and cavity parking failed

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

72 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 38 Typical TX test configuration

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

73

2.5.8 Cancel a TX disconnection


Menu: Connected mode TX test -> End to TX disconnection F + <cr> + 3 + <cr> or F + <OK> + 3 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to reset a TX ("de-isolate") that is disconnected. It reverses the "TX TEST -> TX DISCONNECTION" operation.

TEST RESULTS
The TX returns to CSW control and is reset.

OPERATING MODE
TIB asks for the TX number. To select a TX, enter its number as follows: X + <cr> or x + <OK> where X is a valid TX number:

0 to 3: base cabinet 4 to 7: extension 1 8 to 11: extension 2 12 to 15: extension 3 16 to 19: extension 4 20 to 23: extension 5

TIB checks that the number is valid: If the TX number is wrong, press <esc> or click <Close> to quit. If the number is correct, TIB displays a "please wait" message while the request is executing.

If the reset TX command is refused, TIB outputs the following message:


TX STILL OUT OF REACH

When the command is successful, the result screen is displayed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

74 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main menu.

2.5.9 Display the CCT state of a combiner


Menu: Connected mode CCT test -> CCT configuration status G + <cr> + 1 + <cr> or G + <OK> + 1 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
The test gives, for one combiner, the status of all the cavities, indicating whether a cavity is initialized, tuned, parked, a channel number if the cavity is not parked, and a frequency value.

TEST RESULTS
TIB displays a "please wait" message while the request is executing. In case of BCF link failure, an error message is displayed. When all the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed.
Cavity Number: Initialization: Tune: Channel No: Frequency: Alarm status: P,U stands for Parked Up, P,D stands for Parked Down. 0 to 3 or 0 to 7 Y/N Y/N No/P,U/P,D

ATTENTION
The CCT alarms are operational only if the TX configuration is correct.

The table below gives the meaning of alarm status:


Cavity tuning OK Bad parameters Invalid parameters TX does not transmit or is absent Cavity tuning impossible (VSWR) Frequencies too close or bad Incompatible configuration 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

75

Hardware problem Extension NOK or absent Cavity not initialized Initialization result: NOK

08 09 10 12

OPERATING MODE
Enter or select the number of the combiner to be checked (0 to 5) and wait for the screenful of results.

2.5.10 Disconnect temporarily a CCT


Menu: Connected mode CCT test -> CCT disconnection G + <cr> + 2 + <cr> or G + <OK> + 2 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to temporarily isolate a CCT and the associated TXs to perform special tests or initialize one or more cavities. The CCT power supply must be switched off before using this function, as well as the power supply of all the TXs associated with the CCT (associated type A supply). As soon as CCT isolation is confirmed, the CCT and the TXs can be powered on.

TEST RESULTS
If the operation succeeded, the message "CCT isolated" is displayed. All the associated TXs are also isolated. If not, an error message is displayed. This message may be one of the following:

combiner not ready combiner unknown combiner disconnected combiner absent combiner used TX used

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

76 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

OPERATING MODE
To perform this test, do the following:

Switch off all TXs associated with the CCT to be isolated. Switch off the CCT. Launch the CCT test->CCT disconnection menu. Enter the CCT number (0 to 5). Wait for the "success" message. Power on all the TXs concerned. Power on the CCT. Check the result of the operation using the "TX and CCT status" menu.

2.5.11 Initialize a disconnected cavity


Menu: Connected mode CCT test -> Initialization of a cavity G + <cr> + 3 + <cr> or G + <OK> + 3 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
After a cavity has been disconnected, it can be initialized.

TEST RESULTS
If initialization succeeded, an "OK" message is displayed. After all cavities associated with the combiner have been parked (global parking), the cavity whose number has been given is initialized. If initialization did not succeed, an error message is displayed. This message may be one of the following:

combiner not ready combiner unknown combiner not disconnected combiner absent combiner used event cause 04 (TX does not transmit or is absent) event cause 05 (cavity tuning impossible (SVWR, ...))

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

77

event cause 08 (Hardware problem) event cause 09 (Extension NOK or absent)

OPERATING MODE
The cavity must have been disconnected using the previous function. Enter or select the following parameters:

number of the combiner (0 to 5) number of the cavity (0 to 3 or 0 to 7)

Wait for the "success" or "error" message.

2.5.12 Cancel a CCT disconnection


Menu: Connected mode CCT test -> End of CCT disconnection G + <cr> + 4 + <cr> or G + <OK> + 4 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
This function reverses the "CCT test->CCT disconnection" function.

TEST RESULTS
CCT returns to CSW control. It is parked. If the operation did not succeeded, one of the following messages is displayed:

combiner not ready combiner unknown combiner connected combiner used combiner absent TX not ready TX absent

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

78 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

OPERATING MODE
The parameter to be entered or selected is the number of the CCT to be "reconnected". Wait for the "success" or "error" message.

2.5.13 Display the switching matrix


Menu: Connected mode Switching matrix (connection) H + <cr> or H + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to display the cross connections established in the BTS switching matrix. Radio and signaling channel TS (LAPD channels) can be shadowed in this way.

TEST RESULTS
Overview The internal matrix configuration is displayed in three consecutive arrays. The ordinate of the arrays (left vertical line) gives the list of internal PCM links from 0 to f (PCM), and the abscissa (horizontal title line) the time slots from 0 to 0C for the first array, from 0d to 19 for the second one and from 1a to 1f for the last one. These tables do not describe communication. They represent the internal channel connections. That means this matrix does not change regarding the traffic, it only describes the frame processed by each FP. The PCM and TS are numbered in hexadecimal notation. Meaning The arrays are read line by line (one line for one PCM).

A XX, YY value is displayed at each XX, YY line/column intersection (where XX is the number of the PCM used and YY is the value of the TS used). If the PCM/TS pair displayed at an intersection is used as the coordinates in the array, the original coordinate pair is obtained.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

79

For example, if we obtain PCMa/TS2 (0a,02) at the PCM3/TS3 (03,03) intersection, we obtain the value of (03,03) at the PCMa/TS2 intersection. Specific values The nonstandard values at line/column intersections for each PCM/TS pair are as follows:

L, LL: The PCM/TS is looped back I,II: The PCM/TS is transmitted but not used (padding) ?: problem with the PCM/TS

TS 31 on PCM links 3, 7, 8, 9, and TS 0 on all PCM links are reserved for use by the CSW module (internal board management). Reminder of PCM link definitions The following tables show PCM link breakdown and define their assignments. PCM 0 to 7 are reserved for FPRX needs (see Nortel GSM BTS S4000/S4000C Indoor Fundamentals (411-9001-003), Nortel GSM BTS S4000 Outdoor Fundamentals (411-9001-023), and <53>).
PCM 0 to 3 Traffic Signaling PCM 4 to 7 Traffic Signaling Cabinet 0 TS 1 to 2 TS 0A Cabinet 1 TS 1 to 2 TS 0A Cabinet 2 TS 0B to 0C TS 14 Cabinet 3 TS 0B to 0C TS 14 Cabinet 3 TS 15 to 16 TS 1E Cabinet 5 TS 15 to 16 TS 1E

Internal PCMs 8 and 9 are reserved for DCC boards, PCMs a to f correspond to the external PCMs of DTI boards 0 to 5. The following table gives PCM /DCC associations.
Board DCC 0 DCC 1 DCC 2 DCC 3 PCM 8 9 8 9 TS range 1-0f 1-0f 10-1e 10-1e

The following table gives PCM/DTI associations.


DTI 0 DTI 1 DTI 2 a b c 1-1f 1-1f 1-1f

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

80 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

DTI 3 DTI 4 DTI 5

d e f

1-1f 1-1f 1-1f

Analyzing the information end of the operation.

The results are output to the screen at the

Use the following keys to move from one page to another (no more than three):

<page up> displays the previous screen, <page down> displays the next screen,

or click the window you want to be in the foreground. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode Figure 39 The connection matrix screen

81

2.5.14 Obtain some information on an equipment


Menu: Connected mode Signaling management I + <cr> or I + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to obtain all the information on an equipment module selected through its TEI.

OPERATING MODE
Enter the TEI number.

TEST RESULTS
A screenful of results is displayed at the end of the command run.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

82 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu. When the equipment is configured by BSC and is service, the information is displayed in the following order:

TEI requested by the user (TEI) associated FP (MNU/FP) associated DCC board (DCC) signaling/LAPD channel DTI board and rendez-vous time slot (PCM/TS) associated TX number (for a FPRX) transmission level used in dBm (Power) frequencies used (Frequencies) given in GSM channels

The last 5 fields may not be displayed. One of the following messages is output to the screen, according to the status of the tested module:

"TEI not linked to BSC", which means that the equipment is not used in the BTS configuration. "TEI not connected to BSC", which means that the equipment is defined in the BTS configuration but is not configured by the BSC.

Reminder of TEI definitions The TEI is used to manage communication between BCF and FPRX entities and the BSC. BCF Terminal Equipment Identifier

BCF:TEI between 0 and 15, for example 0 (Basic site cabinet with or without extensions) BCF:TEI=n for the n_th. cabinet in a drop-insert network

FPRX Terminal Equipment Identifiers FPRXTEI=32+(4x<cabinet number>)+<offset in the cabinet> The FPRX TEI are as follows:

Cabinet 0 :TEI=32 to 35 Cabinet 1 :TEI=36 to 39 Cabinet 2 :TEI=40 to 43 Cabinet 3 :TEI=44 to 47 Cabinet 4 :TEI=48 to 51 Cabinet 5 :TEI=52 to 55

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

83

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu (see Figure 31 "TIB connection layout" (page 51)).

2.5.15 Display the TX and CCT alarm states


Menu: Connected mode Board alarms J + <cr> or J + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to ask TX and CCT for the status of ongoing module alarms.

TEST RESULTS
A screenful of results is displayed at the end of the command run. Press <esc> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu. The alarm status of each TX is distributed on four bytes. Each byte is displayed in hexadecimal. Hexadecimal bytes are broken down into binary values by gathering two hexadecimal figures after two others (bit 0: lowest order on right, bit 7: highest order on left). An example of this break-up are shown in the Figure 40 "Break-up of TX alarm display bytes (example)" (page 85). The first byte is broken down as follows: (see Figure 41 "TX alarm status first byte" (page 86))

Bit 0: TX power amplifier (on=1, off=0) Bit 1: high temperature alarm (0 no alarm) Bit 2: high power alarm (0 no alarm) Bit 3: power cabinet alarm (significant only in config state and conditioned by the maximum dynamic power) Bit 4: standing wave voltage ratio alarm, significant in config state only, otherwise is 0 Bits 5 to 7: TX status:

000 not configured 001 configured

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

84 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

010 under test 100 out of use


The second byte is defined as follows, the bits are read from right (bit 0) to left (bit7) (see Figure 42 "TX alarm status second byte" (page 87)):

Bit 0: Out Of Lock alarm from FH bus PLLs (0 no alarm) Bit 1: Out of lock alarm from reference oscillators (0 no alarm) Bit 2: FH flags, this bit is set to one if one or more FH links are not validated. This flag is set to 0 if there is no error, or if the FH bus error mask is not significant. Bit 3: set to 0 Bit 4: Asic external link error (0 no error) Bits 5 to 7: set to 0

The third byte is not significant: its value is set to 00H. The fourth byte is not significant: its value is set to 0.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode Figure 40 Break-up of TX alarm display bytes (example)

85

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

86 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Figure 41 TX alarm status first byte

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

87

Figure 42 TX alarm status second byte

The alarm status of each TXC-C is distributed on two bytes. Each byte is displayed in hexadecimal. An example of this distribution is shown in Figure 40 "Break-up of TX alarm display bytes (example)" (page 85). The hardware status gives the state of the different devices of the board. The bit is set to 0 when the corresponding device is OK. The first byte is broken down as follows (see Figure 43 "TXC-C alarm status first byte" (page 88)):

Bit 0: global SVWR alarm Bit 1: main combiner power supply (24 V) Bit 2: extension combiner power supply (24 V) Bit 3: main combiner hardware problem (tuning detector, etc.) Bit 4: extension combiner hardware problem (tuning detector, etc.) Bit 5: communication failure with the extension

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

88 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Bit 6: main Eeprom full Bit 7: extension eprom full

The second byte is broken down as follows (see Figure 43 "TXC-C alarm status first byte" (page 88)):

Bit 0: main/extension eprom inconsistency Bit 1: extension hard/soft inconsistency Bit 2 to bit 7: set to 0

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.
Figure 43 TXC-C alarm status first byte

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.5 TIB functions in connected mode

89

Figure 44 TXC-C alarm status second byte

2.5.16 Display the TX state


Menu: Connected mode TX state L + <cr> or L + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test permits to display the TX state particularly in frequency hopping with cavity couplers.

OPERATING MODE
To perform the test, proceed as follows:

Start the TX State menu. Enter or select the TX number and press <cr> or click <OK>.

The TIB checks the TX number to see whether it is authorized (0 to 23) and displays the result screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

90 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

TEST RESULT
The result screen provides the following information:

TX state: TX used, TX out of order, TX absent, TX disconnected, TX unused active FH Bus entry (only significant with an hybrid coupler) the supervised input mask (one hexadecimal code for each sector which, when broken down into binary, shows which inputs are supervised on the FH Bus, 1 = yes, 0=no) Example: for S3888 configuration, if the supervised input mask is FFFF00, this means that for the last two sectors, all the inputs are supervised (FF=11111111), and that for the third, none is supervised (00=00000000)

the operational input mask (one hexadecimal code for each sector which, when broken down into binary, shows which inputs are operational on the FH Bus, 1 = yes, 0 = no) cell power (TX power with 4 dB correction) TX power coupling mode (cavity, hybrid) TX mode (TCH, BCCH) frequency

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode


The functions used for on-site BCF maintenance in standalone mode are as follows:

Board status PROM marking Shelf number ALAT alarm reading ALAT output loop tests DCC external test TX configuration FHBUS configuration Switching matrix configuration Board Reset DTI/external PCM test

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

91

Switching matrix Board alarms CCT test Masthead tests

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

92 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 45 Main TIB menu in standalone mode

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

93

2.6.1 Start up a BTS in standalone mode


Menu: Standalone mode Starting installation tests A + <cr> or A+ <OK>

Function used to start up the BTS in standalone mode (see 2.4.2 Launching and quitting the TIL applications (page 35)). The master CSW1 board is reinitialized and CSW1 software is routed in test mode. All TXs are reset. Wait for the message "TX reset OK" before pressing <esc> or before clicking on <Close>.

2.6.2 Display the board state


Menu: Standalone mode Board status B + <cr> or B + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see Figure 34 "Main TIB menu in connected mode (DOS versus Windows)" (page 55))

2.6.3 Display the PROM markings


Menu: Standalone mode PROM marking C + <cr> or C + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.5.2 Display the PROM markings (page 57)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

94 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.6.4 Obtain the TEI value


Menu: Standalone mode Shelf number D + <cr> or D + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.5.3 Obtain the TEI value (page 58)).

2.6.5 Obtain the alarm input state of an ALAT board


Menu: Standalone mode ALAT alarms E + <cr> or E + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.5.4 Display the alarm input state of an ALAT board (page 60)).

TEST RESULTS
Same as in connected mode, except that certain alarms are masked in connected mode and could appear in standalone mode.

2.6.6 Check the ALAT output operation


Menu: Standalone mode ALAT output F + <cr> or F + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
ALAT outputs are remote controls. To check their operation, a measurement on outputs is required.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

95

OPERATING MODE
The procedure is as follows:

Select an output to be tested Measure the voltage at the output Launch the "Alat output" test Give or select an ALAT board number (0 to 5) and confirm:

If this number is correct, TIB requests the number of the output to


be checked. If the number is incorrect, an error message is output.

Give or select an output number, which is the number of the remote control loop of the target ALAT board Select set (0) or reset (1) Select the ALAT type from among the following:

ALAT COMPACT, for S4000C BTS ALAT_O MICRO INDOOR, for S2000 O2 Indoor BTS ALAT_O MICRO OUTDOOR, for S2000 O2 Outdoor BTS

Measure the voltage at the output Compare the result of the measurements, taking into account the command reception message

TEST RESULTS
When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed. The result confirms the number of the previously selected loop and output and the type of operation to be performed. A request acknowledgment is displayed with one of the following values:

OK: operation successful OK (already set): alarm already set OK (already reset): alarm already reset NOK (no remote on the board) NOK (no answer from slave): no answer from ALAT

Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

96 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or select <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu.

2.6.7 Validate the HDLC links of the DCC boards


Menu: Standalone mode DCC external tests G + <cr> or G + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to validate the 15 HDLC links at 64 Kbit/s used on each DCC board in the cabinet (no more than four) by looping back the PCM links on the CSW board. Preconditions The switching matrix (CSW) must be configured with the CONF_DCC.REF file before the test is executed (see function "J" in this Paragraph). The connections set up in the CSW2 matrix are shown in the figure below.

TEST RESULTS
When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed and refreshed every 10 seconds. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode Figure 46 Connections set up in the CSW2 matrix for DCC external tests

97

2.6.8 Congure a TX
Menu: Standalone mode TX configuration H + <cr> or H + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Same as in connected mode regarding functional aspects, but TX group management differs.

TEST RESULTS
When the TX to be configured receives the information, a screenful of results is displayed.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

98 Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

OPERATING MODE
The TX must be in BCCH mode, and the cavity possibly associated must be tuned. Set up the measuring device on the transmission line and make sure the transmitter is correctly charged. A test bench example is given in Figure 38 "Typical TX test configuration" (page 72), representing the configuration used in connected mode.

Enter or select the TX number and press <cr> or click <OK>. For example: <xx> + <cr>, where xx is the TX number (00 to 23) TIB compares the number to the authorized list. It the TX number is not included in the list, an error message is displayed.

Entering the transmission level If the TX number is correct, the transmission level can be entered.

Give the output level in dBm and press <cr> or click <OK>.

The power is expressed in dBm, in steps of 2 dB. Enter 43 for maximum power level measurements. TIB compares the number to authorized power levels. An error message is displayed if the value is illegal. Entering the transmission channel If the requested power level is correct, a transmission channel can be selected.

Enter or select the channel value and press <cr> or click <OK>.

For maximum transmission measurements, the channel corresponding to the middle of the band must be selected. TIB compares the value to the list of authorized channels. When the TX to be configured receives the information, a message shows that the TX is correctly configured. The TX then starts to transmit. Stopping transmission A Reset Y/N message is displayed during transmission. Select Y to stop transmission on all the TXs.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

99

Select N to continue transmission on the TX being tested (all the TX can, therefore, transmit). Return to the main menu, if necessary, and select another TX for transmission configuration. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIB aenu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.

2.6.9 Congure the FH bus


Menu: Standalone mode FH bus configuration I + <cr> or I + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to configure the FH bus for all the TXs housed in cabinets 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. It associates each TX with an FP fed by the same power supply unit. A single FH link (secured, operational, and active) is connected. The transmission level is set to its maximum value and suitable transmission mode is used.

OPERATING MODE
If cavities are used, a list of four or eight frequencies is to be chosen. They cannot be closer than three channels to each other. An error message is displayed otherwise. The cavities are tuned. For this the TXs are set for transmission. At the end, the transmission of the TX is stopped. In the case of hybrid coupler, the TX does not transmit.

TEST RESULTS
When all the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop this test and return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

100

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

The results indicate whether the operation was successful (OK or NOK). At the end of this test, TXs do not transmit anymore.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIB application menu.

2.6.10 Congure the switching matrix


Menu: Standalone mode Switching matrix configuration J + <cr> or J + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to configure the switching matrix for communication tests. Internal PCM and/or selected TS can be looped back. In this way test frames sent by certain boards are returned so that the internal data path or sender board operations can be tested (example: external DCC tests).

TEST RESULTS
If the configuration is accepted, the matrix sends back an acknowledgment.

OPERATING MODE
A parameter value must be entered at the start of the test:

TIB asks for the name of the configuration file.

The default file is CONF_DCC.REF. Execute the following command sequence:


<file name> + <cr>.

or select <file name> and click <OK>. The file name has eight characters at the most, and must have a ".REF" extension. The files available are as follows:

SWM_DCC0.REF: for DTI boards to external PCM test CONF_DCC.REF: for DCC external test SWM_MLFP.REF: for SDA test
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

101

The application checks the file name and displays any errors (wrong name, no file, or wrong configuration). TIB returns the results at the end of the configuration job (OK or NOK). Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop this test and return to the main TIB application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.

2.6.11 Reset a board or a module


Menu: Standalone mode Board reset K + <cr> or K + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to reset a given board or module. The boards and modules that can be accessed are as follows: ALA_x DTI_x DCC_x SYN_x TX_xx CCT_x x on 1 digit, between 0 and 5 x on 1 digit, between 0 and 5 x on 1 digit, between 0 and 3 x on 1 digit, between 0 and 1 xx on 2 digits, between 00 and 23 x on 1 digit, between 0 and 5

where x or xx for TX represents the board or module number. For example, the ALAT0 board name is ALA_0. TX_00 (not TX_0) is the TX 0 board number. Access to CCT boards is also possible with this test.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

102

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

TEST RESULTS
A screenful of results is displayed at the end of the command run. Press <esc> or click <Close> to quit the test and return to the main TIB application menu. The results indicate whether or not the operation was successful (OK or KO).

OPERATING MODE
Additional parameters have to be entered at the start of the test run:

Enter or select the board or module name then <cr> or click <OK>. For example, ALA_0+ <cr> where ALA is the board name and 0 the ALAT board number. If the name is correct, TIB resets the board. If not, an error message is displayed, but there is no supervision of the input step and the user is not informed of any input error.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.

2.6.12 Validate the continuity of the PCM link


Menu: Standalone mode DTI board test -> External PCM L + <cr> or L + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to validate the continuity of the PCM through the BCF. This operation requires a loopback of the DTI PCM input on the outputs. This loop back is performed by using a jumper located on the LP position on the front panel of the tested DTI board as shown in Figure 47 "Looping on the front panel of the DTIs" (page 104). The switching matrix is configured with the SWM_DCC0.REF file. This configuration is represented in Figure 48 "CSW2 matrix connections used for DTI tests" (page 105). This test requires the mandatory presence of an operational DCC0 board.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

103

TEST RESULTS
When the link is correct, the "OK" term is displayed. Otherwise the _" symbol is displayed. If the board is absent, the "A" symbol is displayed.

OPERATING MODE
Once the test is begun, the TIB requires the name of the configuration file. The configuration file must be SWM_DCC0.REF. The connections established in the CSW2 board for this configuration are shown in Figure 48 "CSW2 matrix connections used for DTI tests" (page 105). The user must enter the following sequence: SWM_DCC0.REF + <cr> The application checks the name and informs the user if an error occurs (wrong name, file absence or wrong configuration) or when the configuration is in progress. At the end of the configuration, the TIB indicates the test result. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop this function and return to the main TIB application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIB application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

104

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Figure 47 Looping on the front panel of the DTIs

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

105

Figure 48 CSW2 matrix connections used for DTI tests

2.6.13 Display the switching matrix


Menu: Standalone mode Switching matrix (connection) M + <cr> or M + < OK >

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.5.13 Display the switching matrix (page 78)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

106

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.6.14 Display the TX and CCT alarm states


Menu: Standalone mode Board alarm status N + <cr> or N + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test is the same as in connected mode function (see 2.5.15 Display the TX and CCT alarm states (page 83)) regarding the TX and the CCT. In standalone mode, TIL also indicates alarms for the SYN, DCC, and DTI.

TEST RESULTS
A screenful of result is displayed at the end of the command run. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop this test and return to the main TIB application menu. TX Alarms TX. CCT alarms CCT. The result is the same as in connected mode regarding the

The result is the same as in connected mode regarding

DCC alarm status For the DCC boards the result is presented in two hexadecimal bytes. The 16 bits represented by the pair of bytes each represent the status of a DCC line. The breakdown into binary values is done from right to left (bit 0: low-order on right, bit 15 : high-order on left). The low-order bit corresponds to line 1. A bit is set at 0 if a line is correct and set at 1 if an alarm is detected. The normal status of a DCC is: 00 00. DTI alarm status The DTI board alarm status is displayed in one hexadecimal byte. This byte is broken down as follows:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.6 TIB functions in standalone mode

107

0 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 No PCM alarm Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

1 PCM Alarm NOS AIS RRA LFA FE CRC SKP

Usual byte values are as follows:

0 : Normal (no error) 3 : NOS 5 : AIS 9 : RRA 11 : LFA 21 : FE 41 : CRC 81 : SKP

SYN alarm status SYN alarm status is displayed in one hexadecimal byte. The breakdown into binary elements is done from right to left (bit 0: low-order on right). The bits of this byte have the following significance:

Bit 0: to 0 if SYN master, to 1 if SYN Slave Bits 1 to 3: fixed value 0 Bit 4: value 0 : SYN locked (LOCKED), value 1 : SYN unlocked (UNLOCKED) Bit 5: 0 if normal, 1 if time data alarm, is significant only for master SYN Bit 6: 0 if normal, 1 if warning about timing problem on bus Bit 7: 0 if normal, 1 if 4 Mhz alarm

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

108

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIB application menu.

2.6.15 Display the CCT state of a combiner


Menu: Standalone mode CCT test -> CCT configuration status O + <cr> + 1 + <cr> or O + <OK> + 1 + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.5.9 Display the CCT state of a combiner (page 74)).

2.6.16 Park up the cavities of a combiner


Menu: Standalone mode CCT test -> Global parking O + <cr> + 2 + <cr> or O + < OK > + 2 + < OK >

TEST DESCRIPTION
This function parks up all the cavities of one combiner.

TEST RESULTS
All the cavities are parked up. The result of this action can be checked using the previous menu, "CCT test -> CCT configuration status". The display on the line Channel "No" must be P,U for every cavity associated with the combiner.

OPERATING MODE
The parameter to be entered is the CCT number (0 to 5).

2.6.17 Initialize a disconnected cavity


Menu: Standalone mode CCT test -> Initialization of a cavity O + <cr> + 3 + <cr> or O + <OK> + 3 + <OK>

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

109

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.5.11 Initialize a disconnected cavity (page 76)).

TEST RESULTS
Same as in connected mode, except for the following error messages:

combiner not ready combiner unknown combiner not disconnected combiner absent combiner used TX does not transmit or is absent cavity tuning impossible (SWR) hardware problem extension NOK or absent

2.7 TIF test capabilities


The functions that handle FP on-site maintenance in connected mode are as follows (see Figure 49 "Main TIF screen in connected mode" (page 110)):

board status PROM marking SPU supervision preprocessing end of TIF application

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

110

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Figure 49 Main TIF screen in connected mode

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

111

2.7.1 Display the board state


Menu: Connected mode Board status and BIST A + <cr> or A + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to obtain the states of the following tested FP boards (present/absent/BIST result):

DCU boards (SIGN and SPU processors) MNU board

It does not check the compatibility of the boards in the equipment system version.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

112

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

TEST RESULTS
When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed and refreshed every 10 seconds. The test provides the following information:

BIST result (OK or NOK) BIST status in hexadecimal when BIST result is NOK

If BIST SIGN or MNU is NOK, the SPU BISTs are not significant. For the SPU, the BIST is displayed in 36 bytes. Each byte is coded in two hexadecimal digits. The lower ranked byte (rank 1) is the one located to the far left. When the BIST result is NOK, the operator must identify the byte segment which is different from 0 to find out what equipment has been affected (see the following paragraph). Breakdown of the SPU self-test results The BIST field can be broken down into byte segments. Each segment relates to a FPRX element. BIST results are read from left to right, starting with byte 1. Byte 1 is not significant. Bytes 2 to 25 relate to the DCU board. Byte 26 relates to GSMTIME detection. Bytes 27 and 28 relate to the DCU board. Byte 29 relates to the reception of data coming from the associated RX. Byte 32 provides the RXA version, byte 33 the RXB version. Byte 34 describes RXA alarm, byte 35 RXB alarm. Byte 36 describes RX alarm. When an element is absent or present but not answering, the field is empty. Press <esc> to stop this test and return to the main TIF application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

113

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to stop and return to the main TIF application menu.

2.7.2 Display the PROM markings


Menu: Connected mode PROM marking B + <cr> or B + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to display the PROM labels of the following FP boards:

DCU boards MNU board RX

TEST RESULTS
When the information has been stored, a screenful of results is displayed. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIF application menu. There are three result fields:

PROM name version and edition of PROM software time and date of PROM generation

TIF only displays PROM marking of boards that are present. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIF application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> to return to the main TIF application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

114

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.7.3 Display the SPU state


Menu: Connected mode SPU supervision C + <cr> or C + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Function used to display the status of the SPU. Users can select one or more SPUs. They can also obtain more information on a given SPU. The following information is displayed by the function (see Figure 50 "TDMA SPU monitoring" (page 117)):

time slot number DCU board and SPU numbers Status of each SPU for the four DCU boards of the FP. The values are as follows:

TRAP SPU SPU downloaded SPU initialized cell configured SPU activated

When the SPU is activated, the usable logic channel types are defined. The values are as follows:

TCH + SACCH SDCCH + SACCH BCCH + CCCH BCCH + SDCCH + CCCH BCCH + CCCH + SACCH + SDCCH + CBCH

activation of sub-channels (Bit map act) Two groups of eight bits give the status (0: not activated, 1: activated) of the sub-channels. The left group is for TCH or SDCCH mode, the right group is for SACCH mode.

cell identity (BSIC)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

115

RX alarm (RX_alarm) The following is displayed for time slots activated in TCH:

measured reception level of the current cell (Rxlev) received signal quality measured on the TDMA (Rxqual) signal to noise ratio (snr)
The additional information displayed by this function for a given time slot is as follows (see Figure 51 "Additional information on an SPU" (page 118)):

all the information mentioned above BCCH frequency of the cell (BCCH freq) BCCH transmission power of the cell (BCCH power) RX alarm (RX_alarm) DBF alarm (DBF_alarm) number of frequencies used for each frequency used, the value of this frequency (fx with x between one and eight) The following is displayed for each sub-channel (schx with x between one and eight):

its status (NA: normal activation) transmission advance (T adv) status of the counter for messages transmitted by the mobile
station to maintain communication (Rad.link c)

frequency offset (Fr.off), between received value and measured


value

power relative to the maximum power authorized on frequencies


other than the BCCH frequency (BS power)

training sequence code (TSC) encrypting and decrypting activation statuses (Ciph/Deciph) type of test when the FP is in test mode (Test Type) measured reception level of the current cell (Rxlev) received signal quality measured on the TDMA (Rxqual) signal to noise ratio (snr)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

116

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

OPERATING MODE
In this description, <cr> stands for the "carriage return" key, and letters framed by the "<" and ">" correspond to the keyboard keys used by the operator. To access the test, proceed as follows:

From the main TIF screen, select the "SPU supervision" function with the mouse or with the arrow keys and press Enter to confirm (see Figure 49 "Main TIF screen in connected mode" (page 110)). Activate monitoring on the SPU to be tested or all the SPU of the FP (default configuration). To deactivate SPU monitoring, select a SPU and press the space bar. The "Monitoring inactive" message is displayed in the SPU result area. If a different set of SPUs are selected, mask configuration can be saved with Y (to save the mask) or N (not to save the mask). When the main screen is displayed (see Figure 50 "TDMA SPU monitoring" (page 117)), the ">" symbol indicates the selected time slot. The arrow keys are used to choose another time slot. Press <cr> to obtain more information about this time slot (see Figure 51 "Additional information on an SPU" (page 118)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities Figure 50 TDMA SPU monitoring

117

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

118

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Figure 51 Additional information on an SPU

MEANING OF RXQUAL AND RXLEV VALUES


The values are measured in full mode. Two parameters are used to measure the signal reception quality in uplink communication:

Signal quality: RXQUAL Reception level: RXLEV

The reception level is displayed between 0 and 63. Converting RXLEV into dBM The conversion into dBm of an RXLEV level is performed according to the following formula: Rec_Lev in dBm=RXLEV-110 Meaning of RXQUAL The RXQUAL level is a value from 0 to 7.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

119

The BER (Bit Error Rate) level is evaluated as follows:


RXQUAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BER less than 0.2 % 0.2 % to 0.4 % 0.4 % to 0.8 % 0.8 % to 1.6 % 1.6 % to 3.2 % 3.2 % to 6.4 % 6.4 % to 12.8 % greater than 12.8 % Average 0.14 % 0.28 % 0.57 % 1.13 % 2.26 % 4.53 % 9.05 % 18.1 %

For good communication quality, a value lower than 3 must be obtained.

2.7.4 Display the values of the preprocessing parameters


Menu: Connected mode Preprocessing -> Preprocessing parameters D + 1 + <cr> or D + 1 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test allows the operator to check the parameter values of preprocessing algorithms. Their modification is not allowed and must only be performed from OMC.

OPERATING MODE
Select the menu D : Preprocessing and activate the function. The TML requests the processor number. Validate it by pressing <cr> or clicking on <OK>.

TEST RESULT
When the preprocessing is active and the request is correct, the results are displayed on more than one screen (eight to twelve depending on the number of adjacent cells). To go from one screen to the next use the PageUp and PageDown keys.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

120

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 1/8 Processor Number : 0 Processing Actif Cell Type : Normal Type Algo : : A Rxlev : Number of averaged measurement : 8 Number of averaged average : 2 Weighting : 60 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rxqual : Number of averaged measurement : 8 Number of averaged average : 2 Weighting : 80 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 2/8 Processor Number : 0 RxLev Power Control threshold : Uplink : Inc : 15 Red : 26 Downlink : Inc : 15 Red : 26 Rxqual Power Control threshold : Uplink : Inc : 00.57 Red : 00.28 Downlink : Inc : 00.57 Red : 00.28 Neighboring cells : Number of averaged measurement : 8 Distance : Number of averaged measurement : 4 Weighting : 40 30 20 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 3/8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

121

Processor Number : 0 Handover Rxlev threshold : Uplink : 10 Downlink : 10 Intra_Up : 16 Intra_Dw : 16 Handover Rxqual threshold : Uplink : 18.10 Downlink 18.10 Distance max MS BTS Handover : 61 Distance max MS BTS clear : 63 Power control step : Inc : 2 Red : 1 Tx maximum power : 39 Handover criterion : Power budget : Inactif Distance : Inactif Intra_cell : Inactif BTS Power BTS : Inactif MS Power BTS : Inactif =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 4/8 Processor Number : 0 Weighting for missing measurement : RxLev : 90 Rxqual : 110 Distance : 110 Number of required measurement : Clear : 16 Handover : 4 Power control : 2 Missing Neighboring cells : 5 Power conversion to dBm 43 39 37 33 29 Level conversion to dBm 43 41 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 09 07 05 spare1 : 0 spare2 : 0 =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 5/8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

122

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Processing Actif List Number Neighboring cells 11 0 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 09 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture: 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 1 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 0a Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture: 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 2 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 08 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture: 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 6/8 : 0

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

123

Processing Actif List Number : 0 Neighboring cells 11 3 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 07 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture: 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 4 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 06 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture: 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 5 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 05 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture: 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 7/8

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

124

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC Processing Actif List Number : 0 Neighboring cells 11 6 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 04 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture : 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 7 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 03 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual: 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture : 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 8 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 02 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual : 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture : 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 =========================================================== === [D] Preprocessing parameters 8/8 Processing Actif List Number : 0 Neighboring cells 11 9 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 01 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual : 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture : 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 10 BSIC : 06 BCCH : 00 Cell Type : Normal Tx max power : 31 HO Margin : 04 HO Margin Lev : 4 HO Margin Qual : 04 HO Margin Dist : 4 Stability : 10 (dB) Tempo Confirm capture : 4 Rxlev min : 00 spare 1 : 0 2 : 0 [F] End of TIF application Mon Jan 20 19:09:20 1997 =========================================================== ===
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

125

ERRORS
The display is different in the following cases:

If the request is incorrect, an error message is displayed. It may be one of the following:

Dump NOK Dump Time-out Dump refused with one of the following causes: object unknown dump unknown type unknown object already film object film inexistant object film impossible TS unknown processor unknown CD unknown Cle unknown SCle unknown Sign unknown DLCI unknown DLU unknown processor inactive TEI different Dump object incorrect Dump incorrect Dump unknown PB receive

If the preprocessing is inactive, a message indicates it.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

126

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.7.5 Display and check the decisions made by the preprocessing


Menu: Connected mode Preprocessing -> Preprocessing result D + 2 + <cr> or D + 2 + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
This test allows users to monitor and check the decisions made by the preprocessing and display the results of the actions performed every 496 milliseconds.

OPERATING
Select the menu D: Preprocessing and activate the function. The TML requests the Time Slot and CD number. Validate it by pressing <cr> or clicking on <OK>. CD is the number of dedicated channel, from 0 up to 7.

TEST RESULT
The results are displayed on two screens. These screens are different depending on the type of decisions taken so that the pertinent results are shown on the first screen. The measurements are made every 496 milliseconds, but the screen is refreshed only when decisions are made.
Time Slot Number : 2 CD Number : 0 ======================================================= = [D] Preprocessing result

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.7 TIF test capabilities

127

Cnx state : handover Cell Type : Umbrella Power BS : NO Current : 0 Reference : 0 Ctrl MS : NO Current : 2 Reference : 2 DTX BS : unused MS : unused Handover : Level down MS class : 39 RxLev 0 0 0 13 26 26 26 26 Down 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 TxPow 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Down 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rxqual 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 Down 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 eligibles Cells : BSIC: 03 RxLev: 23 23 22 23 23 BCCH: 01 23 23 23 22 22 Time Slot Number : 2 CD Number : 0 ======================================================= = [D] Preprocessing result RxLev 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 Up 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 TxPow 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Up 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rxqual 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 Up 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 00.14 Ta 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

The measurements displayed are as follows:

time slot number and CD Number connection status (Cnx, state): idle, inactive, no handover, handover, clear active cell type: Normal, Umbrella, Micro_cell power control BS and MS (Power BS, Ctrl MS): Activation (YES, NO) and current and reference value DTX used for BS and MS handover cause: Quality up, Level up, Quality down, Level down, Distance, Power budget, intra-cell up, intra-cell down, caption, _ _ (no handover cause) RxLev up and RxLev down measurement. The RxLev unity is defined by the following formula: RxLev (dBm) = RxLev-110

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

128

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

TxPower up and TxPower down (Tx Pow) The conversion can be done using the conversion table: power to dBm.

RxQual up and RxQual down measurement The RxQual unity is a percentage. The timing advance The conversion of the timing advance (displayed) to the meter value is as follows: TA (m) = TA* (T*V)/(2* BP) with BP = 156.25 T = 3/5200 V = 3.108

definition of the eligible cells

2.8 TIF functions in standalone mode


The functions that handle FP on-site maintenance in standalone mode are as follows:

starting installation tests board status and BIST PROM marking SDA test RX test end of TIF application

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.8 TIF functions in standalone mode Figure 52 Main screen of the TIF in standalone mode

129

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

130

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

2.8.1 Start up the FP in standalone mode


Menu: Standalone mode Starting installation tests A + <cr> or A + <OK>

This function is used to start up the FP in standalone mode. Wait for the "CONNECTION ESTABLISHED" message before pressing <esc> or clicking on <Close>.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.8 TIF functions in standalone mode

131

2.8.2 Display the board state


Menu: Standalone mode Board status and BIST B + <cr> or B + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.7.1 Display the board state (page 111)).

2.8.3 Display the PROM markings


Menu: Standalone mode PROM marking C + <cr> or C + <OK>

This test is the same as in connected mode (see 2.7.2 Display the PROM markings (page 113)).

2.8.4 Congure the SDA for a transmission reception test


Menu: Standalone mode SDA test D + <cr> or D + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to configure all the SDAs of an FP for a transmission/reception test. Loop back the CSW matrix before beginning the test by launching the J menu "Switching matrix configuration" of TIB in standalone mode (see Paragraph2.6.10 Configure the switching matrix (page 100)). The configuration file to be used is SWM_MLFP.REF. The connections established in the CSW2 board for this configuration are shown in Figure 53 "SDA test: CSW2 configuration" (page 133).

TEST RESULTS
Once the test result has been collected, the overall response is displayed: OK or NOK.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

132

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

The number of errors is then displayed with two bytes (four hexadecimal characters). If the number of errors is too big, the value is FFFE. This generally arises from a bad choice of the configuration file. The result is given for each SDA of the FP.

OPERATING MODE
To access the test proceed as follows:

Use the file SWM_MLFP.REF to set the switching matrix parameters (TIB standalone, J menu). Mention the duration of the test (duration of the transmission). The effective duration of the test is nearly ten times more than the value above, so wait for the end of the test. Press <esc> or click <Close> to stop the test and return to the main TIF application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIF application menu.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.8 TIF functions in standalone mode Figure 53 SDA test: CSW2 configuration

133

2.8.5 Perform a reception frequency test


Menu: Standalone mode RX test E + <cr> or E + <OK>

TEST DESCRIPTION
Test used to ask a receiver (RX) to run an overall test of reception frequencies. This test detects the following:

reception failures:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

134

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

loss of gain parasite lines

outside pollution:

interference
It is also possible to check reception of signals from the mobile stations (test the antenna + multi-coupler + receiver input chain). The accuracy of measurements is, however, not comparable to the results obtained by spectrum analysis. The radio test program measures the reception levels of each of the channels within a chosen range (GSM900 or GSM1800) and transmits them to the user in the form of a graphic display. Each range of measurement covers 124 channels with handover. Measurements are taken on the normal reception channel on the RX input (reception multi-coupler output).

OPERATING MODE
To perform the RX test, you must select the following:

TS number frequency range the input from among the following: RXA normal RXA diversity RXB normal RXB diversity

TEST RESULTS
The result is displayed in graphic form (bar graph type graphic scale, see Figure 54 "RX test results" (page 136)). When the test result has been collected, the results are displayed in the form of a graph with the channels corresponding to the frequencies as its abscissa and the reception levels in dBm as its ordinate. The scale for the graph adapts automatically; the zoom factor is calculated to contain the result within the window.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

2.8 TIF functions in standalone mode

135

You have to adjust the screen contrast to see the different channels black or white. Press <esc> or click <Close> to quit the test and return to the main TIF application menu.

ERRORS
If an error message is displayed, press <esc> or click <Close> to return to the main TIF menu application.

LIST OF FREQUENCIES
GSM 900 Fixed (TX) 935.200-959.800 MHz => Ch.1-124 Fixed (RX) 890.200-914.800 MHz => Ch.1-124 Separation between adjacent channels: 200 KHz Duplex deviation : Dd = 45 MHz RxLFr = 890 MHz GSM1800 Fixed (RX) 1710.200-1784.800 MHz => Ch.1-374

Fixed (TX) 1805.200-1879.800 MHz => Ch.1-374 Separation between adjacent channels: 200 KHz Duplex deviation : Dd = 95 MHz RxLFr = 1710 MHz Frequency calculation RX frequency = channel no. x 0.200 MHz + RxLFr TX frequency = Rx frequency + Dd

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

136

Chapter 2 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL RTC

Figure 54 RX test results

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

137

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM


3.1 Introduction
The TIL checks BTS equipment and pinpoints a certain number of hardware problems. The TIL COAM applies to the following BTS:

S2000 H/L S8002 S8000 CBCF and S8000 CSWM S8003 S8006 S12000 BTS 9000 BTS 18000 BTS 6000

This tool operates in the Windows 98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT, Windows XP, or Windows Vista environment.

3.2 BTS operating mode for test runs


The BTS can perform tests in two modes:

standalone connected (on-line)

The TIL detects the available connection by talking to the BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

138

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.2.1 Start-up conguration in standalone mode


The BTS disregards the Abis interface in standalone mode and is cut off from the PCM link that connects it to the BSC, or the signaling link between BTS and BSC cannot be established. The operator has to completely restart the BTS after tests have been executed and the TIL disconnected.

3.2.2 Start-up conguration in connected mode


The BTS is connected to the BSC. The BCF (btsSiteManager object) and the DRX are downloaded. In connected mode, the TIL does not disturb BTS operations.

3.3 TIL COAM installation


The TIL COAM installation is possible from:

floppy disks: see 3.3.1 From floppy disks (page 138) CD-ROM: see 3.3.2 From CD-ROM (page 139)

3.3.1 From oppy disks


Perform the following steps to install the TIL COAM:

Insert the PE_BTS_TIL_COAM floppy disk into the floppy disk drive. Open the floppy disk folder. Run the setup.exe program file. A logo window appears. The installation window Setup temporarily displays.

Figure 55 Setup window

When 100% is reached, the real product installation starts.

Wait for the display of the Setup Complete window.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.3 TIL COAM installation Figure 56 Setup Complete window

139

Select the Finish button to complete the installation. Wait for the The installation is finished message to display. Restart Windows by selecting Shut Down from the Start menu in the task bar. When Windows has reopened, check in the Start ->Programs menu that the Tml ->BTS Tools ->TIL COAM VaaYbbb" path contains the TIL COAM program.

The installation procedure is complete.

3.3.2 From CD-ROM


Perform the following steps to install the TIL COAM:

Insert the CD-ROM in the drive. Open the Windows Explorer window of the Start ->Programs menu. Select the CD-ROM drive. Open the Tmltools directory. Double click the Setup.exe file. The installation window Setup of the TML tools temporarily displays:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

140

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM Figure 57 Setup window

Wait for the display of the Installation window.

Figure 58 Installation window

By default all the TML tools are selected.

Select the language: Franais-French or English-Anglais. Select the Clear All button to deselect all the products.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 141

Select TIL COAM, and then click the Install button to begin only the TIL COAM installation. The TIL COAM Setup screen is displayed. Wait for the display of the Setup Complete window.

Figure 59 Setup Complete window

Select the Finish button to complete the installation. Check in the Start ->Programs ->Tml menu that the TIL COAM VaaYbbb (depending on your version) program is present.

The installation procedure is complete.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000)
3.4.1 Presentation 3.4.1.1 PC configuration
The PC must be configured in TCP/IP mode.

3.4.1.2 External interface


An Ethernet link interfaces the PC and the BTS. This link is used for messages exchanged by the PC and the BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

142

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

A PCMCIA synchronous board serves as an interface. Special functions When you have filled out the fields of configuration screen, the TIL COAM interface is a graphic display of BTS front panel. Access to equipment using the menu bar A menu bar displays the different equipment of the cabinet. Access to main functions using the tools bar A tool bar gives a direct access to main functions of the TIL. Access to commands using the board display click the button representing a module or a board on this zone with the mouse to display the tests available for this equipment and for the current BTS mode (connected or standalone).

3.4.1.3 Result tracing


Two modes are available for result recording: automatic and manual. The mode is chosen in the BTS configuration screen. Test results are stored in files with the .res extension in c:\til_coam\fich.r es\. All the files are ASCII files and can be edited and printed.

3.4.2 Launching and quitting the TIL applications 3.4.2.1 Launching the TIL
To launch the TIL in standalone or connected mode, perform the following actions:

Click Start -> Programs -> Tml -> BTS Tools -> Til Coam VaaYbbb -> Til Coam from the Windows task bar. The TIL COAM Configuration screen is displayed (see Figure 60 "TIL COAM screen interface" (page 143)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 143 Figure 60 TIL COAM screen interface

Fill out the following fields:

the language (French or English) the site identification: three parameters are mandatory:

the site name the site code the user name

the BTS configuration: the possible choices are:

BTS 6000 BTS 6000 with RICAM BTS 9000 BTS 18000 BTS 18000 with RICAM S12000 S8000 CBCF
For the S8003 and S8006 BTS, select S8000 CBCF from the drop-down list.

S8002 CBCF S8000 CSWM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

144

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

S2000 SBCF 01, 02, S11, 02 Single Feeder, 04, 04 Single Feeder only for S2000
H/L BTS

cabinet number: 1, 2 or 3

the result save mode:

automatic: the results are saved after each refreshment of the


screen

manually: the results are saved only by action of the operator

the alarm configuration file: select the Browse button. The Alarm configuration screen appears. Select the alarm file corresponding to the BTS configuration. Then select OK. the color in respect of the BTS state:
State Not defined Absent Present and Slave not connected Hardware fault Standalone slave State NOK State OK White Black Orange Red Green Color Yellow Gray

The default configuration is advised.

CC8 module (only for the S8000 BTS with CBCF). Select:

cabinet(s) concerned by the CC8: main and/or extension cabinet VSWR alarm

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 145 Figure 61 TIL COAM screen interface with cavity coupling

Two choices are possible to validate the configuration screen:

OK button: the TIL displays the cabinet view corresponding to the chosen configuration. There is no connection to the BTS. Connection button: the screen "BTS Connection" appears (see Figure 62 "Selection of connection mode" (page 145)). Fill in the "TIL connection mode" field:

Figure 62 Selection of connection mode

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

146

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

peer to peer and confirm ethernet network: enter the IP address of the BCF module then
click "Connection" The TIL displays the cabinet view (Figure 63 "TIL COAM main screen for S2000 H/L BTS" (page 147) to Figure 67 "TIL COAM main screen for S8000 BTS (CSWM)" (page 151)) according to the BTS type.

3.4.2.2 Quitting the TIL


To quit the TIL, choose one of the following methods:

Select the

symbol on the top right hand corner of the TIL main window.

Select the

symbol on the tool bar.

Select the "Connection" menu from the menu bar, and choose "Exit".

CAUTION
Working instructions
Do not perform a BCF reset in connected mode: the reset of the DRX is automatic.

The following figures show examples of the TIL with various configurations:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 147 Figure 63 TIL COAM main screen for S2000 H/L BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

148

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 64 TIL COAM main screen for S8000 BTS (CBCF), the S8003, or S8006 BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 149

Figure 65 TIL COAM main screen for S8000 BTS (CBCF) (with CC8)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

150

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 66 TIL COAM main screen for S8002 BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 151

Figure 67 TIL COAM main screen for S8000 BTS (CSWM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

152

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 68 TIL COAM main screen for S8000 BTS (CSWM) with eDRX and ePA

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 153

Figure 69 TIL COAM main screen for S12000 BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

154

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 70 TIL COAM main screen for BTS 18000

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 155

Figure 71 TIL COAM main screen for BTS 18000

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

156

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 72 TIL COAM main screen for BTS 6000

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 157

Figure 73 TIL COAM main screen for BTS 6000 with RICAM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

158

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 74 TIL COAM main screen for BTS 9000 with RICAM

3.4.3 Operation of the TIL COAM 3.4.3.1 Dialogue with the BTS
During testing in STANDALONE or CONNECTED mode, the TIL COAM must be connected:

to the Ethernet connector "ETH" of the active CMCF board ("ON" led lit) of the S12000, S8000 BTS(CBCF), S8002 BTS, S8003, or S8006 BTS (see Figure 75 "Connecting the TIL COAM to an S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, or S8006 BTS" (page 161)) to the Ethernet connector "ETH" of the active CSWM board ("ON" led lit) of the S8000 BTS (CSWM) (see Figure 76 "Connecting the TIL COAM to an S8000 BTS with CSWM" (page 162)) to the "TEST" connector of the S2000 H/L BTS (see Figure 77 "Connecting the TIL COAM to an S2000H FP BTS" (page 163) and Figure 78 "Connecting the TIL COAM to an S2000L EP BTS" (page 164))

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 159

to the Ethernet connector "ETH" of the active ICM of a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, or BTS 18000 (see Figure 79 "Connecting the TIL COAM to a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, or BTS 18000, with ICM" (page 166)) to the Ethernet connector "ETH0" of the ICAM or RICAM of a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, or BTS 18000 (see Figure 80 "Connecting the TIL COAM to a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, or BTS 18000 (with ICAM/RICAM)" (page 167))

S12000, S8000, S8002, S8003, and S8006 BTS case: At least one CMCF and one CPCMI or one CSWM and one PCMI are needed to make the connection possible. The BCF software configures the switching matrix so that it supports the BTS internal communication function to be used by the TIL O&M for access to the various devices. When quitting tests in STANDALONE mode, perform a BCF reset. The TIL COAM uses BTS internal communications for access to the various entities (BCF, DRX, etc.). A single connection point (on the active CMCF (S12000 and S8000 BTS) (CBCF), S8002, S8003, or S8006 BTS) on the active CSWM (S8000 BTS (CSWM) or on the TEST connector (S2000 H/L BTS)) is thus needed for access to the various entities. The TIL COAM must also check that the link with the entity is established. The modules that can thus be queried by the TIL COAM are:

S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS (CBCF), S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, or S8006 BTS:

the CMCF modules with the associated elements the RECAL boards the DRX/PA (eDRX/ePA for S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, and S8006
BTS or eDRX2/ePA for S12000 BTS and S8000 BTS (CBCF)) modules

the CPCMI boards the CC8 module (only S8000 BTS (CBCF))

S8000 BTS (CSWM):

the BCF modules with the associated elements the DSC boards the SYNC boards the CSWM boards
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

160

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

the GTW boards the PCMI boards the ALCO boards the DRX/PA (eDRX/ePA) modules

S2000 H/L BTS:

the SBCF module the DRX modules

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 161 Figure 75 Connecting the TIL COAM to an S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, or S8006 BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

162

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 76 Connecting the TIL COAM to an S8000 BTS with CSWM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 163

Figure 77 Connecting the TIL COAM to an S2000H FP BTS

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

164

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 78 Connecting the TIL COAM to an S2000L EP BTS

BTS 6000, BTS 9000, and BTS 18000 case For BTS 18000 family products (BTS 18000, BTS 6000 and BTS 9000), the Ethernet cable has to be connected to the ICM, ICAM, or RICAM, depending on which module is present in the BTS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 165

The TIL COAM uses BTS internal communications for access to the various BTS entities (such as the radio modules). A single connection point on the active ICM or ICAM/RICAM thus provides all the required access for the TIL COAM application. The modules that can be thus queried are:

the ICM boards the ABM boards the RM boards RICAM boards

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

166

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 79 Connecting the TIL COAM to a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, or BTS 18000, with ICM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 167 Figure 80 Connecting the TIL COAM to a BTS 6000, BTS 9000, or BTS 18000 (with ICAM/RICAM)

3.4.4 TIL COAM general documentation principles


In order to simplify use of the TIL COAM, the tests are presented in the form of test sheets with the following headers:

the test mode: STANDALONE and/or CONNECTED the name of the test the access path of the tests linked to a type of board

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

168

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.4.5 Graphic display of the cabinet


The main screen represents the front panel of the BTS, with its maximum board configuration. This gives a graphic display of the status of all the entities on the same screen (see Figure 63 "TIL COAM main screen for S2000 H/L BTS" (page 147) to Figure 69 "TIL COAM main screen for S12000 BTS" (page 153)). The drawing of each board or entity comprises a sensitive zone represented by a rectangular button. click this zone with the mouse to display the tests available for this entity according to the current BTS mode (standalone or connected) in a pop-up menu. The TIL COAM application automatically detects the type of the radio modules and it represents them accordingly. For example, in case of 18000/6000 BTS, the TIL COAM application automatically detects whether the Radio Module type is RM/HPRM/MPRM and displays them accordingly. In the case of S8000 BTS, the TIL COAM application automatically detects the type of DRX and displays them accordingly. Missing or inaccessible entities or functions are shaded in gray. A menu bar also gives access to the various functions using the mouse or the keyboard shortcuts. The tool bar permits a fast access to some functionalities:

Exit from the TIL COAM

Connect to a BTS (only accessible if the TIL is not already connected)

Close the connection with a BTS (only accessible if a connection is open)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 169 Display the configuration screen to change a parameter. Only the following parameters can be modified: language

states/colors results save mode alarms configuration automatic tests (only S8000 and S8003 BTS)

Display information about the TIL

The colored box on each board also acts as a LED indicating the state of the board. The number of board states depends on the BTS state. Each state is symbolized by a color.

In standalone mode, six states are possible:

Green : Bists and alarms OK Red : Bists and/or alarms NOK Gray : board missing or off Yellow : not defined state (non established connection) Black : device faulty (for DRX (eDRX or eDRX2) only) White : present but not configured

In connected mode, seven states are possible. The following state is added to the above list:

Orange : device disconnected (for DRX (eDRX or eDRX2) only) Sync Disconnection is possible in the case of S8000 CSWM.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

170

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

On every DRX (eDRX or eDRX2) module, the DRX (eDRX or eDRX2) number is displayed (independently of the connection mode).

3.4.6 TIL COAM functions in connected and/or standalone mode


The functions used for local maintenance of the S2000 H/L, S12000, S8002, S8003, and S8006 and S8000 BTS in connected and/or standalone mode are described in Table 1 "Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes" (page 170). This table also shows the paragraph where the function is described.
Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Bists

3.5.1 Display the BIST results (page 189) 3.5.2 Di splay the markings (page 192) 3.5.3 Dis play the I and C con figuration (page 193) 3.7.1 Con figure the BTS par ameters (page 262) 3.5.4 Displ ay the TEI (page 193)

Markin g

Iand C config uration display

Iand C configu ration

Status

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 171 Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Matrix display

3.5.5 Di splay the switching matrix (page 195) 3.5.6 Display the BIST results of the CSWM board (page 197) 3.5.7 Di splay the markings of the CS WM board (page 198) 3.5.8 Di splay the switching matrix (page 199) 3.5.9 Displ ay the TEI (page 200) 3.5.10 Display the BIST results of the DSC board (page 202)

Bists

Markin g

Matrix view

Status

Bists

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

172

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Markin g

3.5.11 D isplay the markings of the DSC board (page 203) 3.5.12 Display the alarm state of the DSC board (page 203) 3.7.2 Test the DSC boards (page 263) 3.7.3 Restart the DSC board (page 264) 3.5.13 Display the BIST results of the SYNC board (page 204) 3.5.14 Display the mar kings of the SYNC board (page 205)

Alarms

DSC test

Reset

Bists

Markin g

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 173 Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Alarms

3.5.15 Display the alarm state of the SYNC board (page 205) 3.7.4 Re start the SYNC board (page 264) 3.6.1 Di sconnect the SYNC board (page 247) 3.6.2 C onnect the SYNC board (page 248) 3.5.16 D isplay the STATUS results of the GTW board (page 206) 3.5.17 Display the mar kings of the GTW board (page 207)

Reset

Discon nection

Conne ction

Status

Markin g

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

174

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Reset

3.7.5 Restart the GTW board (page 264) 3.5.18 Display the GTW Visualizati on (page 207) 3.5.19 Display the PCMI alarms (page 209) 3.5.20 Display the BIST results of the PCMI boards (page 210) 3.5.21 Display the mar kings of the PCMI boards (page 211)

GTW Visual ization

Alarms

Bists

Markin g

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 175 Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Status

3.5.22 Display the para meters of the PCMI boards (page 211) 3.7.6 Test the exter nal PCM loopback (page 265) 3.7.7 Res tart a PCM interface board (page 265) 3.5.23 Display the alarm state (page 212) 3.5.24 Display the BIST results of the RECAL or ALCO boards (page 218) 3.5.25 Display the marki ngs of the RECAL or ALCO boards (page 219)

Extern al PCM test

Reset

Alarms display

Bists

Markin g

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

176

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Reset

3.7.8 R estart a RECAL or ALCO board (page 265) 3.6.3 Dis connect a DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 248) 3.6.4 C onnect a DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 248) 3.5.26 Display the alarm state of the ABM board (page 220) 3.5.27 Display the BIST results of the ABM board (page 221)

Discon nection

Conne ction

TX Bist s

AMNU Bists

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 177 Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

SPU Bists

3.5.34 Display the BIST results of the DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 229) 3.5.35 Display the state and the ala rms of the DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 231) 3.5.36 D isplay the DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 markings (page 233) 3.5.37 Check the reception (page 233) 3.5.38 Display the DRX/ eDRX/eD RX2/DRX ND3 state and its sensitivity (page 234)

Alarms

Markin g

RX test

DRX (eDRX) status

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

178

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

SPU supervi sion

3.6.5 Display the SPU state of a DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 249) 3.7.9 Test PCM of on e DRX/eD RX/eDRX2 /DRX ND3 (page 266) 3.7.10 Reset a DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 266) 3.7.15 C onfigure a TX (page 268) 3.7.16 C onfigure a TX in TCH mode (page 270) 3.7.17 Stop the PA (ePA) transmissi on (page 271)

PCM test

Reset

BCCH configu ration

TCH config uration

Trans missio n mode

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.4 TIL COAM (TIL for S2000 H/L, S8000, S8002, S8003, S8006, S12000, BTS 18000, BTS 9000 and BTS 6000) 179 Table 1 Common functions to connected and/or standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CBCF) and 1S8003 BTS S8002 BTS an d S8006 BTS

Connect ed

Stand alone

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Config ure

S8000

3.5.39 Co nfigure the cavities (page 234) 3.5.40 Display the CC8 markings (page 237) 3.5.39 Co nfigure the cavities (page 234) 3.5.40 Display the CC8 markings (page 237) 3.7.18 Loopback PCM (page 271) 3.7.19 Test the external PCM (page 271) 3.5.42 Battery Remote Maintena nce and Status Monitoring (page 239)

Markin gs

S8000

Config ure

S8000

Markin g

Traffic PCM lo opback

Extern al PCM tests

Battery switc hing on/off

S8002

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

180

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes


The functions used for local maintenance of the S2000 H/L, S12000, S8000, S8002, S8003, and S8006 BTS in connected and standalone mode are described in Table 2 "Common functions to connected and standalone modes" (page 180).
Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

SBCF/CMCF 3.5.1 Di splay the BIST results (page 189) 3.5.2 Di splay the markings (page 192) 3.5.3 Displa y the I and C configuration (page 193) 3.5.4 Displ ay the TEI (page 193)

Bists

Marking

Iand C co nfiguration display

Status SW

Matrix display

3.5.5 Di splay the switching matrix (page 195)

CSWM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

181

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Bists

3.5.6 Displa y the BIST results of the CSWM board (page 197) 3.5.7 Di splay the markings of the CSWM board (page 198) 3.5.8 Di splay the switching matrix (page 199) 3.5.9 Displ ay the TEI (page 200)

Marking

Matrix view

Status DSC

Bists

3.5.10 Display the BIST results of the DSC board (page 202) 3.5.11 Display the markings of the DSC board (page 203) 3.5.12 Display the alarm state of the DSC

Marking

Alarms

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

182

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

board (page 203) SYNC 3.5.13 Display the BIST results of the SYNC board (page 204) 3.5.14 Display the markings of the SYNC board (page 205) 3.5.15 Display the alarm state of the SYNC board (page 205)

Bists

Marking

Alarms

GTW 3.5.16 Display the STATUS results of the GTW board (page 206) 3.5.17 Display the markings of the GTW board (page 207) 3.5.18 Display the GTW Vis

Status

Marking

Switching matrix

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

183

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

ualization (page 207) PCMI/CPCMI/S PCMI 3.5.19 Displ ay the PCMI alarms (page 209) 3.5.20 Display the BIST results of the PCMI boards (page 210) 3.5.21 Display the markings of the PCMI boards (page 211) 3.5.22 Display the parameters of the PCMI boards (page 211)

Alarms

Bists

Marking

Status

ALCO/RECAL

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

184

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Alarms display

3.5.23 Display the alarm state (page 212) 3.5.24 Disp lay the BIST results of the RECAL or ALCO boards (page 218) 3.5.25 Display the markings of the RECAL or ALCO boards (page 219) 3.5.32 Display the BIST results of the TX (page 227) 3.5.33 Disp lay the BIST results of the AMNU (page 228) Figure 84 "SPU Bists of a chosen eDRX" (pag e 230)3.5.34 Display the BIST results of the DRX/eDRX/

Bists

Marking

DRX (eDRX)

TX Bists

AMNU Bists

SPU Bists

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

185

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

eDRX2/DRX ND3 (page 229) 3.5.35 Display the state and the alarms of the DRX/ eDRX/eDRX 2/DRX ND3 (page 231) 3.5.36 Display the DRX/eDRX/ eDRX2/DRX ND3 marki ngs (page 233) 3.5.37 Check the reception (page 233) 3.5.38 Display the DRX/eDRX/ eDRX2/DRX ND3 state and its sensitivity (page 234)

Alarms

Marking

RX test

DRX (eDR X) status

DRX (eDR X2) 3.5.32 Display the BIST results of the TX (page 227)

TX Bists

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

186

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

AMNU Bists

3.5.33 Disp lay the BIST results of the AMNU (page 228) 3.5.34 Disp lay the BIST results of the DRX/eDRX/ eDRX2/DRX ND3 (page 229)Figure 84 "SPU Bists of a chosen eDRX" (page 230) 3.5.35 Display the state and the alarms of the DRX/ eDRX/eDRX 2/DRX ND3 (page 231) 3.5.36 Display the DRX/eDRX/ eDRX2/DRX ND3 marki ngs (page 233) 3.5.37 Check the reception (page 233) 3.5.38 Display the DRX/eDRX/

SPU Bists

Alarms

Markings

RX test

DRX (eDR X2)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

187

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

eDRX2/DRX ND3 state and its sensitivity (page 234) ABM 3.5.27 Display the BIST results of the ABM board (page 221) 3.5.26 Display the alarm state of the ABM board (page 220) 3.5.28 Display the markings of the ABM board (page 223)

Bists

Alarms

Marking

RM/MRM/TDMA 3.5.29 Display the alarm state of the RM/M RM/TDMA (page 224) 3.5.30 Display the BIST results of the RM/M RM/TDMA board (page 224)
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Alarms

Bists

188

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Marking

3.5.31 Display the markings of the RM/M RM board (page 226)

CC8 3.5.39 Configure the cavities (page 234) 3.5.40 Disp lay the CC8 markings (page 237)

Configure

S8000

Markings

S8000

CA 3.5.39 Configure the cavities (page 234)

Configure

S8000

Functions 3.5.40 Disp lay the CC8 markings (page 237) 3.5.42 Batt ery Remote Maintenance and Status Monitoring (page 239)

Marking

BRC Monit oring

S8002

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

189

Table 2 Common functions to connected and standalone modes (contd.) S8000 BTS (CB CF) and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 180 00 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS (C SWM)

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

Inventory

3.5.43 Disp lay a global inventory (page 244) 3.5.41 Display the CLK status (page 239)

Available synchro nization sources

S8000

3.5.1 Display the BIST results


Menu: Connected and standalone modes SBCF -> BISTS (S2000 H/L BTS) CMCF -> BISTS (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002, S8003, S8006 BTS)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST for a particular device. The BIST for the SBCF entities (S2000 H/L BTS) are the following:

Data bus test Sequential DRAM test DRAM CS2 test DRAM CS3 test DRAM CS4 test MTS test Smcf Fpga test Spcmi Fpga test SMC1 test SMC2 test

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

190

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Smcf Fpga Line 1 test Smcf Fpga Line 2 test Ethernet SCC1 test

The BIST for the CBCF entities (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) are the following:

Master Quicc test Slave Quicc test Master DMA test Slave DMA test DRAM test Matrix 0 test Matrix 1 test Silent generator test TSA A master test TSA A slave test MUX PCM test TSA B slave test GSM time test Frequency meter test Ethernet test HDLC inter CMCF link test

The BIST for the ICM entities (BTS 18000 and BTS 6000) are the following:

SDRAM test Ethernet test MCC test ABIS test D link test HDLC link test I2C link test

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

191

There is a difference in the BIST details for the BTS 18000, BTS 6000, BTS 18000 RICAM and BTS 6000 RICAM. The following table describes these differences which occur in the number of fields for MCC_result, ABIS test and D link test:
Table 3 BIST detail for BTS with and without RICAM Test fields SDRAM test Ethernet test MCC test ABIS test D link test HDLC link test I2C link test BTS 18K 1 1 2 8 6 1 1 BTS 6K 1 1 2 4 3 1 1 BTS 18K RICAM 1 1 1 4 3 1 1 BTS 6K RICAM 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 BTS 9K 1 1 1 4 2 1 1

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the following information:

the name of the entity the state of the entity

Each entity displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

green if the BIST is OK (with default configuration) red if the BIST is NOK (with default configuration)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

B_SBCF.res for S2000 H/L BTS B_CMCF.res for S12000, S8000, S8002, S8003 and S8006 BTS B_ICM.res for BTS 18000 and BTS 6000

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

192

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.5.2 Display the markings


Menu: Connected and standalone modes SBCF -> Marking (S2000 H/L BTS) CMCF -> Marking (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) ICM -> Markings (BTS 18000/6000)

In this sheet, the "BCF" word is indiscriminately used for SBCF or CBCF modules.

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to identify the marking of the software downloaded into the BCF. This function gives the prom marking of the following entities:

BCF application BCF DLU0 BCF DLU1 the marking of the RECAL and CPCMI slaves (only S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS, and S8003 BTS)

TEST RESULT
The result is displayed in a window and generally contains four fields:

name of the entity load name software version and release date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

MRQ.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

193

3.5.3 Display the I and C conguration


Menu: Connected and standalone modes SBCF -> I and C configuration display (S2000 H/L BTS)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the configuration of the S2000 H/L BTS.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the following information:

the TEI number the using PCM0 the using PCM1 the first commissioning flag the frames type (PCM T1) the distance board-plug box (PCM T1) the VGA values (for S2000H BTS) the using CRC4 (PCM E1)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

CONF_IC.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.4 Display the TEI


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CMCF -> Status (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) ICM -> Status (BTS 18000/6000) SBCF -> Status (S2000 H/L BTS)

In this sheet, the "BCF" word is indiscriminately used for SBCF or CBCF modules.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

194

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to obtain the following information:

the shelf number the Rendez-Vous Time Slot the BCF TEI the Configuration mode

TEST RESULT
Once the information is recorded, the result screen appears. The value of the Rendez-Vous Time Slot is always equal to the value of the BCF TEI incremented by one. The BCF TEI is obtained by deducting one from the Rendez-Vous TS number. The BCF rack number is calculated with the following formula: Shelf No. (Hexadecimal) = complement of the four low-order bits of the CBCF TEI. Click Save to save the result to a file. Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

INTERPRETATION
Three parameters are configured in the CSU rack:

shelf number BCF rack TEI Rendez-Vous Time Slot

The last two are derived from the first one. Rendez-Vous Time Slot adding 1 to the TEI. RV TS=TEI+1 Example: The Rendez-Vous Time Slot is calculated by

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

195

For a CSU shelf number equal to 0f:

TEI = 00 Rendez-Vous Time Slot = TEI+1=1

3.5.5 Display the switching matrix


Menu: Connected and standalone modes

SW -> Matrix display (S2000 H/L BTS, S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS and BTS 18000/6000)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the connection made within the BTS switching matrix. The routing of the radio and signaling channel TSs (LAPD channels) can thus be followed.

TEST RESULT
General presentation The internal configuration of the matrix is displayed in table form (see Figure 81 "Switching matrix connections display" (page 196)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

196

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM Figure 81 Switching matrix connections display

The X axis of this table (horizontal title line) lists the time slots TSs from 0 to 31 (0 - 225 for BTS 18000), and the Y axis (vertical line at left) the internal PCMs:

from 0 to 7 (S2000 H/L BTS) from 0 to 15 (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF for CMCF Phase 1, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, and S8006 BTS) from 0 to 21 (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF for CMCF Phase 2) from 0 to 9 (BTS 18000)

These tables do not describe the communications, but represent the channel connections. In other words, this matrix does not change as a function of traffic, but describes the frame processed by each DRX (eDRX). The PCM and TS numbering is decimal. Interpretation Interpretation is row by row (1 row represents a PCM).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

197

At each XX, YY row/column intersection (where XX is the PCM number and YY the TS number used) a value XX,YY is displayed, meaning that PCM/TS XX,YY is connected to PCM/TS XX,YY. If we use a PCM/TS pair displayed at an intersection as coordinates in the table, we can find the original coordinate pair (full-duplex link). For example, if at intersection PCM(1)/TS(3) (1,3) we find PCM(0)/TS(1) (0,1), then value (1,3) is found at intersection PCM(0)/TS(1). Specific values The non-standard values at the row/column intersection for each PCM,TS are:

"Loop": the transmit PCM/TS is looped back on the reception PCM/TS. "Idle": the PCM/TS is not used but takes a silence code.

Using the information The table is not completely visible on the screen. Click the >> and << buttons to display the rest of switching matrix. Click Refresh to update the data. Click Exit to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.6 Display the BIST results of the CSWM board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CSWM > BISTS (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST of the active CSWM board, including:

DRAM Test Horloge Test O1M Bus 1G Test Matrix 0 Test Matrix 1 Test Test Joncteur de Test Test Joncteur Idle 0 Test Joncteur Idle 1 O&M Bus 2G Test PCM IT 0 Test

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

198

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

HSCX chanel A test HSCX chanel B test Data O&M bus 2G Test Ethernet test

TEST RESULT
The result window gives

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_CSWM.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.7 Display the markings of the CSWM board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CSWM -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to identify the marking of the CSWM board.

TEST RESULT
The result is displayed in a shaded window and generally comprises four fields:

name of the equipment load name software version and release date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

199

MRQ.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.8 Display the switching matrix


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CSWM -> Matrix view (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the connections made within the BTS switching matrix. The routing of the radio and signaling channel TSs (LAPD channels) can thus be followed.

TEST RESULT
General presentation The internal configuration of the matrix is displayed in table form (see Figure 82 "Switching matrix view display" (page 199)).
Figure 82 Switching matrix view display

The X axis of this table (horizontal title line) lists the timeslots (TS) from 0 to 31, and the Y axis (vertical line at left) the PCMs (from 0 to 7 for S2000, 0 to 15 for S8000).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

200

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

These tables do not describe the communications, but represent the channel connections. In other words, this matrix does not change as a function of traffic, but describes the frame processed by each DRX (eDRX). Interpretation Each column represents 1 timeslot and each row represents 1 PCM. At the intersection of a row and column, the PCM TS connection coordinates can be found. For example (in the figure "Switching matrix connections display"), the connection coordinates of PCM1 and TS3 are "13,21". Othere values can also be found on this matrix:

"Idle": this means that the PCM/TS is not used. "Loop": this means that the PCM/TS is looped back for the reception of PCM/TS.

Using the information Once the operation is completed, the result window appears. The table is not completely visible on the screen. To display the rest of it, click a cell: a horizontal and a vertical scroll bar appear enabling the entire switching matrix to be displayed. Click Refresh to update the data. Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.9 Display the TEI


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CSWM -> Status (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to obtain the following information:

the Rendez-Vous Time Slot the BCF TEI Shelf Number Configuration

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

201

TEST RESULT
Once the information is recorded, the result screen appears. The value of the Rendez-Vous Time Slot is always equal to the value of the BCF TEI incremented by one. The BCF TEI is obtained by deducting one from the Rendez-Vous TS number. The CSU rack number is calculated with the following formula: Shelf No. (Hexadecimal) = complement of the four low-order bits of the BCF TEI. The Save button is used to save the result to a file. This button is disabled (shaded grey) if recording mode was set to automatic. Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

INTERPRETATION
Three parameters are configured in the CSU rack:

CSU shelf number CSU unit TEI Rendez-Vous Time Slot

The last two are derived from the first one. CSU shelf TEI number The TEI number is obtained by calculating the 2s complement of the four low-order bits of the CSU rack number (in binary logic exclusive-OR with value 1111). Example: Shelf number=0f, or in binary 00001111 The TEI is equal to: <Shelf number> XOR 1111 = 0000=0. Rendez-Vous Time Slot adding 1 to the TEI. RV TS=TEI+1 Example: The Rendez-Vous Time Slot is calculated by

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

202

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

For a CSU shelf number equal to 0f :

TEI = 00 Rendez-Vous Time Slot = TEI+1=1

3.5.10 Display the BIST results of the DSC board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes

DSC -> BISTS (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST of the DSC board, including:

Test PIC Test 85C30 HSCX 1 test HSCX 2 test HSCX 3 test HSCX 4 test HSCX 5 test HSCX 6 test HSCX 7 test HSCX 8 test

TEST RESULT
The result window gives:

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the dot to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

203

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_DSC.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.11 Display the markings of the DSC board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DSC -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to identify the PROM marking of the DSC board.

TEST RESULT
The result is displayed in a shaded window and generally comprises four fields:

name of the equipment load name software version and release date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

MRQ.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.12 Display the alarm state of the DSC board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DSC -> Alarms (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function gives the state of the alarms of the DSC board.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the name and number of the board (in the window title) and the list of its alarms.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

204

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to an alarm. The state of this alarm is given by the color of the dot to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the alarm is not activated red if it is activated

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

ALA_DSC.res

For LNA and DLNA alarms, the name of the result file is the name of the ALCO alarms file. This name has been selected in the configuration screen. The file extension is ".res". Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

INTERPRETATION
16 alarms (Alarm circuit 1 to Alarm circuit 16) are available, one for each DSC line.

3.5.13 Display the BIST results of the SYNC board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes SYNC -> BISTS (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST of the SYNC board, including:

PLL_DAC error RAM Error Microprocessor error

TEST RESULT
The result window gives

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the dot to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

205

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_SYN.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.14 Display the markings of the SYNC board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes SYNC -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to identify the PROM marking of the SYNC board.

TEST RESULT
The result is displayed in a shaded window and generally comprises four fields:

name of the equipment load name software version and release date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

MRQ.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.15 Display the alarm state of the SYNC board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes

SYNC -> Alarms (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function gives the state of the alarms of the SYNC board.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the name and number of the board (in the window title) and the list of its alarms.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

206

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to an alarm. The state of this alarm is given by the color of the box to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the alarm is not activated red if it is activated

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

ALA_SYN.res

For LNA and DLNA alarms, the name of the result file is the name of the ALCO alarms file. This name has been selected in the configuration screen. The file extension is ".res". Click Cancel to return to the TIL O&M main screen.

INTERPRETATION
The alarms are as follows.

time data alarm, significant for the master SYNC board bus timing problem 4 MHz alarm

3.5.16 Display the STATUS results of the GTW board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes GTW -> STATUS (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the STATUS of the GTW board.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives:

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the dot to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

207

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_gtw.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.17 Display the markings of the GTW board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes

GTW -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to identify the PROM marking of the GTW board.

TEST RESULT
The result is displayed in a shaded window and generally comprises four fields:

name of the equipment load name software version and release date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

MRQ_gtw.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.18 Display the GTW Visualization


Menu: Connected and standalone modes GTW -> GTW Visualization (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the connections made within each GTW board. It can also be used to display and modify the configuration of the GTW elements, in other words, the GSM_TIME, the DRXs, and the ALCO board.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

208

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST RESULT
The result is presented in table form, with one line corresponding to each DRX (eDRX). The BTS configuration is displayed in the bottom left corner: S888 configuration or particular configuration. The connections are arranged in three groups, two of four columns and one of two columns, corresponding to the different link types:

TRAFFIC link OML link O&M link

In the case of the TRAFFIC and OML links, for a given DRX, the first two columns give the incoming pair (internal PCM, internal Time Slot), while the last two columns give the outgoing pair (private PCM, private Time Slot). In the case of the O&M link, for a given DRX number, the two columns give the pair (private PCM, private Time Slot). By double-clicking a cell on the line corresponding to a given DRX, you access the configuration window for the DRX in question. For the TRAFFIC and OML link types, you can enter a pair (internal PCM, internal Time Slot) and a pair (private PCM, private Time Slot). For the O&M link type, you can enter a pair (private PCM, private Time Slot). The Detail button at the bottom of the configuration display window is used to display the configuration of the GTW elements. When you click this button, another window appears, enabling you to display the following parameters:

the GSM_TIME the presence of DRXs (eDRXs) correspondence between (PrivatePCM(n), privateTS(n)) and (internalPCM(n), internalTS (n)) for ALCO board (n=0, 1, 2)

Click Refresh to go back to the gateway configuration display window. Click Exit to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

209

3.5.19 Display the PCMI alarms


Menu: Connected and standalone modes SPCMI -> Alarms (S2000H/LBTS) CPCMI -> Alarms (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) PCMI -> Alarms (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

In this sheet, the "PCMI" word is indiscriminately word for SPCMI board (S2000 H/L BTS), CPCMI board (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, and S8006BTS) and PCMI board (S8000 BTS with CSWM).

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the PCMI alarms.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the following information:

the name of the entity the state of the entity

Each entity displayed corresponds to an alarm. The states of this alarm is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

green if the alarm is OK (with default configuration) red if the alarm is NOK (with default configuration)

The result window gives the following information for each PCM0 and PCM1:

using PCM NOS alarm SIA alarm RRA alarm LOS alarm TE alarm CRC alarm S1S2 alarm

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

ALA_PCMI.res

Click Exit to return to the TIL COAM main screen.


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

210

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.5.20 Display the BIST results of the PCMI boards


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CPCMI -> BISTS (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) PCMI -> BISTS (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BISTs for the CPCMI or PCMI board. The BISTs for the CPCMI or PCMI board are the following:

external RAM alarm HSCX alarm PCM0 alarm PCM1 alarm

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the following information:

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the mnemonic:

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

B_CPCMI.res B_PPCMI.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

211

3.5.21 Display the markings of the PCMI boards


Menu: Connected and standalone modes

CPCMI -> Marking (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8003) PCMI -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to identify the marking of the CPCMI or PCMI board. "Marking" is also accessible with the summary function "Functions -> Marking".

TEST RESULT
The result comprises four fields:

object name (equipment) "LOAD" name software version and release date and time

Press <esc> or click the mouse button to clear the window and continue with the tests. Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

MRQ.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.22 Display the parameters of the PCMI boards


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CPCMI -> Status (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) PCMI -> Status (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to display the parameters of the CPCMI or PCMI board:

the PCM type: E1 or T1 the multiframe type:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

212

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

PCM E1, simple trame PCM E1, multi trame PCM T1, SF PCM T1, ESF

the coding type: HDB3, AMI, or B8ZS for each PCM, the CRC used or not used for each PCM, the terminal type:

75 120
Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.23 Display the alarm state


Menu: Connected and standalone modes ALCO -> Alarms display (S2000 H/L BTS, S8000 BTS with CSWM) RECAL -> Alarms display (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the ALCO (S2000 H/LBTS and S8000 BTS with CSWM) and RECAL (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, and S8006 BTS) alarms (external and internal) and the temperature zone indication (S2000 H/L BTS only). S2000 H/L BTS: The following alarms are displayed:

the temperature zone indication:

low temperature zone normal temperature zone high temperature zone

the ALCO alarms:

VGA 0 alarm VGA 1 alarm AC alarm DC alarm very high temperature zone very low temperature zone

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

213

external alarm 0 external alarm 1 external alarm 2 external alarm 3 external alarm 4 external alarm 5
S12000 BTS (Indoor and Outdoor Configurations) The alarm mnemonics displayed depend on the choices in the BTS configuration screen (DLNA/VGA with LNA, VSWR). The alarm DALIs described here are in the 2G numbering scheme. 104 alarms are collected by the RECAL board. They include the following:

56 are internal alarms and are not protected (ventilation system, batteries, power supply, coupling system, BTS cabinet miscellaneous, BTS cabinet environment). These alarms can be used only inside the cabinet. 16 are external alarms and are protected (these alarms can be used outside the cabinet by adding two ALPRO cards, each card valid for eight alarms). 32 are external alarms and are not protected (these alarms can be used inside or outside the cabinet, but never off-site).

Alarms 0, 2-7, 81, 83, and 14 concern the power supply system.
S12000 BTS Mnemonic DISTRIB_BK AC_RECTIFIER DC_RECTIFIER TEMP_RECTIFIER LEVEL_RECTIFIER BK_RECTIFIER BAT_RECTIFIER CONV0_F_OR CONV1_F_OR BATTERY_DISC Comment Distribution breaker Rectifier AC alarm Rectifier DC alarm Rectifier temperature alarm Rectifier level alarm Rectifier breaker alarm Discharged batteries alarm Converter alarm Converter alarm Batteries disconnected switch

Alarms 8 to 13 are User Space alarms.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

214

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Alarms 15 to 20 concern the batteries cabinet.


S12000 BTS Mnemonic TEMP_BAT_CAB POWER_BAT_CAB DOORS_BAT_CAB BAT_CAB_RES BAT_CAB_RES BAT_CAB_RES Comment Batteries temperature alarm Batteries power supply alarm Batteries cabinet door open Reserved batteries cabinet Reserved batteries cabinet Reserved batteries cabinet

Alarms 32 to 79 concern the coupling system: Combiner (COMB), Voltage Stationary Wave Rate (VSWR), and Level (LVL). Alarms 84 to 86 are blower alarms. Alarm 87 is a miscellaneous alarm.
S12000 BTS Mnemonic DOORS_CONTACT Comment Doors open detection

Alarms 88 - 103 are external alarms. S8000 BTS ALCO and RECAL Outdoor Configurations The alarm mnemomics displayed depend on the choices in the BTS configuration screen (DLNA/VGA with LNA, VSWR). The alarm DALIs described here are in the 1G numbering scheme. 102 alarms are collected by the ALCO or RECAL board. The alarms vary slightly between Indoor and Outdoor configurations, and include the following:

66 are internal alarms and are not protected (ventilation system, batteries, power supply, coupling system, BTS cabinet miscellaneous, BTS cabinet environment). 16 are external alarms and are protected (these alarms can be used on the site, as defined by the operator). The others are not used.

Alarms 0 to 13 concern the ventilation system.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

215

S8000 BTS Outdoor Configuration Mnemonic PRESSURE_HGT_1 PRESSURE_LOW_1 FAN_COND_1 FAN_EVAP_1 AC_FAULT_1 DC_FAULT_1 ORAL_COOLING_1 PRESSURE_HGT_2 PRESSURE_LOW_2 FAN_COND_2 FAN_EVAP_2 AC_FAULT_2 DC_FAULT_2 ORAL_COOLING_2 Comment High pressure threshold 1 Low pressure threshold 2 Fan 1 condenser Fan 1 evaporator AC alarm 1 DC Alarm 1 Logic OR on fan 1 alarms High pressure threshold 2 Low pressure threshold 2 Fan 2 condenser 2 Fan 2 evaporator AC alarm 2 DC alarm 2 Logic OR on fan 2 alarms

Alarms 14 to 19 concern the batteries cabinet.


S8000 BTS Outdoor Configuration Mnemonic TEMP_BAT_CAB POWER_BAT_CAB DOORS_BAT_CAB BAT_CAB_RES BAT_CAB_RES BAT_CAB_RES Comment Batteries temperature alarm Batteries power supply alarm Batteries cabinet door open Reserved batteries cabinet Reserved batteries cabinet Reserved batteries cabinet

Alarms 32 to 39 correspond to external alarms 8 to 15. Alarms 48 to 60 concern the power supply system.
S8000 BTS Outdoor Configuration Mnemonic DISTRIB_BK AC_RECTIFIER DC_RECTIFIER TEMP_RECTIFIER Comment Distribution breaker Rectifier AC alarm Rectifier DC alarm Rectifier temperature alarm

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

216

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

S8000 BTS Outdoor Configuration Mnemonic LEVEL_RECTIFIER BK_RECTIFIER BAT_RECTIFIER CONV_F_1V_A CONV_F_1V_B BATTERY_DISC Comment Rectifier level alarm Rectifier breaker alarm Discharged batteries alarm F_1V_A converter alarm F_1V_B converter alarm Batteries disconnected switch

Alarms 62 to 85 concern the coupling system: Combiner (COMB), Voltage Stationary Wave Rate (VSWR) and Level (LVL). Alarms 86 to 88 are miscellaneous alarms.
S8000 BTS Outdoor Configuration Mnemonic DOORS_CONTACT Comment Doors open detection

Alarms 91 to 96 are User Space alarms. Alarms 97 to 102 are used for DLNA. Alarms 104 to 111 are external alarms. S8000 BTS ALCO and RECAL Indoor Configurations and S8003 Indoor BTS The alarm mnemomics displayed depend on the choices in the BTS configuration screen (DLNA/VGA with LNA, VSWR). The alarm DALIs described here are in the 1G numbering scheme. 102 alarms are collected by the ALCO or RECAL board. The alarms vary slightly between Indoor and Outdoor configurations, and include the following:

66 are internal alarms and are not protected (ventilation system, batteries, power supply, coupling system, BTS cabinet miscellaneous, BTS cabinet environment). 16 external protected alarms are displayed on the TIL, but only eight alarms are usable (these alarms can be used on the site, as defined by the operator). The other eight (external alarms eight to fifteen, which correspond to alarms 32-39) appear RED on the TIL. The others are not used.
Mnemonic PRESSURE_HGT_1 Comment High pressure threshold 1

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

217

Mnemonic PRESSURE_LOW_1 FAN_COND_1 FAN_EVAP_1 AC_FAULT_1 DC_FAULT_1 ORAL_COOLING_1 PRESSURE_HGT_2 PRESSURE_LOW_2 FAN_COND_2 FAN_EVAP_2 AC_FAULT_2 DC_FAULT_2 ORAL_COOLING_2

Comment Low pressure threshold 2 Fan 1 condenser Fan 1 evaporator AC alarm 1 DC Alarm 1 Logic OR on fan 1 alarms High pressure threshold 2 Low pressure threshold 2 Fan 2 condenser 2 Fan 2 evaporator AC alarm 2 DC alarm 2 Logic OR on fan 2 alarms

Alarms 32 to 39 correspond to external alarms 8 to 15. Alarms 48 and 49 concern the power supply system.
Mnemonic CONV_F_1V_A CONV_F_1V_B Comment F_1V_A converter alarm F_1V_B converter alarm

Alarm 50 is a miscellaneous alarm.


Mnemonic DOORS_CONTACT Comment Doors open detection

Alarms 52 to 75 concern the coupling system: Combiner (COMB), Voltage Stationary Wave Rate (VSWR), and Level (LVL). Alarms 97 to 102 are used for DLNA. Alarms 104 to 111 are external alarms.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives the following information:

the name of the entity the state of the entity

Each entity displayed corresponds to an alarm. The states of this alarm is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

218

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

green if the alarm is OK (with default configuration) red if the alarm is NOK (with default configuration)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

ALA_ALCO.res (S2000 H/L BTS or S8000 BTS with CSWM) ALA_RECAL.res (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS)

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.24 Display the BIST results of the RECAL or ALCO boards


Menu: Connected and standalone modes RECAL -> BISTS (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) ALCO -> BISTS (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST for RECAL or ALCO boards, and includes:

for the ALCO Bists

Internal loopback 0 to 7 Internal loopback 8 to 15 Internal loopback 16 to 23 Internal loopback 24 to 31 External loopback

for the RECAL bists:

External RAM HSCX TEST RESULT


The result window gives:

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the mnemonic:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

219

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following files:

B_RECAL.res B_ALCO.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.25 Display the markings of the RECAL or ALCO boards


Menu: Connected and standalone modes RECAL -> Marking (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) ALCO -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to identify the marking of RECAL or ALCO board. "Marking" function is also accessible by the summary function "Functions -> Marking". Test result The result comprises four fields:

the object name the load name the software version and release the date and time

The marking is displayed in a shaded window. Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

MRQ.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

220

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.5.26 Display the alarm state of the ABM board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes ABM -> Alarms

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the ABM alarms (external and internal). Each even or odd ABM is able to manage up to 8 DALE (external protected alarms) and 20 DALI (internal non-protected alarms).

Only one ABM for each cabinet manages the UCPS (even ABM of each cabinet). Alarms 144 to 152 are the Rectifier and Battery system alarms.

The following information is displayed for the DRX:


Mnemonic RECT_FAIL_AC RECT_FAIL_DC RECT_HIGH_TEMP BATT_LEVEL1 DDU_BREAKERS CONTROL_BOARD BATT_DISC BATT_ON_DISCH THERMAL_PROBE Rectifier AC fault Rectifier DC fault Rectifier High Temperature alarm Rectifier Level Alarm Rectifier DDU breakers Rectifier Control Board Alarm Battery Disconnected alarm Discharged batteries alarm Battery Thermal Probe alarm Comment

Alarms 25 to 29 are user alarms Alarms from 17 to 21 are external battery cabinat alarms
Mnemonic TEMP_BAT_CAB BATT_POWER_DC BATT_DOOR BATT_POWER_AC BATT_SURG_PROTECTOR Comment Batteries Temperature alarm DC circuit breaker open Battery Cabinet door open AC circuit breaker is open Surge protector failure

Alarms 32 to 39 are external alarms Alarms 40 to 48 are control system alarms

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

221

Mnemonic BLOWER_0 BLOWER_1 HEATER_0 HEATER_1 DAMPER AIR_INLET EXT_SENSOR_FAILED INT_SENSOR_FAILED TEMPERATURE

Comment Blower is down or over temperature Blower is down or over temperature Heater is down Heater is down Damper Alarms The output filter is clogged Thermal sensor for external temperature failed Thermal sensor for internal temperature failed Temperature out of normal range

Alarms 16 and 31 concern the AC Distribution Box alarm. Alarm 24 is the cabinet door alarm. Alarms 40 to 48 are control system alarms. Alarms 161 to 178 concern access (module presence) to coupling system alarms in any one of the following: DDM; TxF; DDM(H2); H3; H4 or TxF(H2).

TEST RESULT
Each entity displayed corresponds to an alarm. The states of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

green if the alarm is OK (with default configuration) red if the alarm is NOK (with default configuration)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

ALA_ABM.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.27 Display the BIST results of the ABM board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes ABM -> BISTS (BTS 18000/6000)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST for the BTS 18000/6000 ABM boards;.

General Result

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

222

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

ALPRO POWER (5 volts power supply is OK) DALE/RC POWER (12 volts power supply is OK) CCU Interface Ethernet interface SDRAM test

Inventory Result

Combiner 8 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 7 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 6 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 5 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 4 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 3 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 2 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 1 inventory EEPROM 12C access Combiner 0 inventory EEPROM 12C access RM2 inventory EEPROM 12C access RM1inventory EEPROM 12C access RM0 inventory EEPROM 12C access ABM inventory EEPROM 12C access SPM inventory EEPROM 12C access ICM inventory EEPROM 12C access IFM inventory EEPROM 12C access RICAM inventory EEPROM1 2C access

IO Expander Result

Combiner 8 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 7 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 6 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 5 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 4 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 3 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 2 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 1 alarms I/O expander 12C access Combiner 0 alarms I/O expander 12C access

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

223

TEST RESULT
The result window gives:

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each mnemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the menemonic.

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_ABM.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.28 Display the markings of the ABM board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes ABM -> Marking (BTS 18000/6000)

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to identify the marking of an ABM board The "Marking" function is also accessible by the summary function "Functions ->Marking".

TEST RESULT
The result comprises four fields:

the object name the load name the software version and release the date and time

The marking is displayed in a shadow window. Click "Save" to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

MRQ.res

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

224

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Click "Cancel" to return to the TIL COAM admin screen.

3.5.29 Display the alarm state of the RM/MRM/TDMA


Menu: Connected and standalone modes RM -> Alarms (BTS 18000/6000) TDMA -> Alarms (BTS 18000/6000)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the RM/MRM and TDMA alarms (external and internal). Each RM/MRM module generates two types of alarms.

Alarms that are global to the whole module Alarms related to a particular TDMA of the module

RM/MRM PLL out of lock PSU alarm

TDMA High temperature (RM only) High current (RM only) PLL out of lock No flag on SPU link Automatic level control TDMA error Diversity loss - main Diversity loss - diversity

3.5.30 Display the BIST results of the RM/MRM/TDMA board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes RM -> BISTS (BTS 18000/6000) MRM -> BISTS (BTS 18000/6000) TDMA -> BISTS (BTS 18000/6000)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

225

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to find out the detailed result of the BIST for the BTS 18000/6000 RM/MRM and TDMA boards. RM/MRM

TCMU DSP load SDRAM Flash FRAMER 0 FRAMER 1 FRAMER 2 Elink DPRAM Ethernet Alarm PS

TDMA TX IRAM ERAM EROM DMA SLM DPRAM PCM link PLL lock AR1 Segmentation BB_FILT bus BB_FILT IT GSM time Ciphering

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

226

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST RESULT
The result window gives:

in its title, the name, board number and overall BISTs result (OK if all the BISTs are OK) in its content, the list of board BISTs

Each menemonic displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the menemonic.

green if the BIST is OK red if the BIST is NOK

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_RM.res B_TDMA.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.31 Display the markings of the RM/MRM board


Menu: Connected and standalone modes RM -> Markings (BTS 18000/6000) MRM -> Markings (BTS 18000/6000)

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to identify the marking of an RM or MRM board. The "Marking" function is also accessible by the summary function "Functions ->Marking".

TEST RESULT
The result comprises four fields:

the object name the load name the software version and release the date and time

The marking is displayed in a shadow window. Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

227

MRQ.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.32 Display the BIST results of the TX


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> TX Bists

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the BISTs of the tested TX. The following information is displayed for the DRX:

PLL test RAM test Compatible ASIC versions DLU compatible ASIC test Serial port test CAN test TX-PA Link

The following information is displayed for the eDRX or eDRX2: TX-PA link entity

TEST RESULT
Each entity displayed corresponds to a BIST. The states of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

green if the BIST is OK (with default configuration) red if the BIST is NOK (with default configuration)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_TX.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

228

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.5.33 Display the BIST results of the AMNU


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> AMNU Bists

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the BIST of the AMNU of the chosen DRX (or eDRX or eDRX2). The following information is displayed for DRX:

DRAM test DPRAM B test MIC test Ethernet test DPRAM A test BSM test local O&M test

The following information is displayed for eDRX or eDRX2: DRAM test FPGA AMMU load FPGA AMMU test PCM test DPRAM test Ethernet test TX/BDT access

TEST RESULT
Each entity displayed corresponds to a BIST. The state of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

green if the BIST is OK (with default configuration) red if the BIST is NOK (with default configuration)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_AMNU.res

Click Exit to return to the TIL COAM main screen.


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

229

3.5.34 Display the BIST results of the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> SPU Bists

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the BIST of the SPU of the chosen DRX (see Figure 83 "SPU Bists of a chosen DRX" (page 229)) or eDRX (see Figure 84 "SPU Bists of a chosen eDRX" (page 230)) or eDRX2 (see Figure 85 "SPU Bists of a chosen eDRX2" (page 231).
Figure 83 SPU Bists of a chosen DRX

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

230

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Figure 84 SPU Bists of a chosen eDRX

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

231

Figure 85 SPU Bists of a chosen eDRX2

TEST RESULT
Each entity displayed corresponds to a BIST. The states of this BIST is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity.

green if the BIST is OK (with default configuration) red if the BIST is NOK (with default configuration)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

B_SPU.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.35 Display the state and the alarms of the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3
Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> Alarms

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

232

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to obtain the status alarms of the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 which is tested.

TEST RESULT
Each entity displayed corresponds to an alarm. The status of this alarm is given by the color of the box to the left of the entity:

green if the alarm is OK (with default configuration) red if the alarm is NOK (with default configuration)

The alarms are the following: states:

DRX state (possible state: Configured/Not configured/In test/Out


of use)

PA - DRX link state (possible state: Valid/Not valid) PA state (possible state: Valid/Not valid)

PA alarms:

high temperature high current alarm cabinet low power VSWR alarm high masthead temp HPA alarm radio sub-system alarm (AUC) automatic Level Control (ALC) PA power shutdown (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS, and S2000H/LBTS
only)

LNA alarms (S2000 H/L BTS only):

LNA 0 alarm LNA 1 alarm

RX alarms:

main RX connector diversity RX connector

diversity alarms:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

233

diversity loss - main channel diversity loss - diversity channel

causes if DRX state failure:

RX PLL alarm TX alarm


Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

ALA_DRX.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.36 Display the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 markings


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> Markings

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to identify the marking of the software downloaded into the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3.

TEST RESULT
The result is displayed in a window and generally comprises four fields:

name of the entity load name software version and release date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

MRQ.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.37 Check the reception


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> RX test

TEST PRESENTATION
The DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 is configured by the TIL.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

234

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

This function is used to measure the power level on the main or the diversity A and B channels for a chosen DRX.

ATTENTION
This test is available only if the TX is disconnected.

TEST RESULT
The result display is the following:

histogram measurement list with the maximal power level

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

TEST_RX.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.38 Display the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 state and its sensitivity


Menu: Connected and standalone modes DRX -> DRX status

TEST PRESENTATION
This function gives the status of the chosen DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 and its sensitivity.

TEST RESULT
The following information is displayed:
Displayed BCF Connected TDMA configured Standalone DRX type Sensitivity Comment DRX is connected to the SBCF TDMA is configured DRX is isolated to the SBCF egal 1, egal 2, New Design, Edge -108dBm, -110dBm, Unknown

Click "Close" to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.5.39 Congure the cavities


Menu: Connected and standalone modes CC8 -> Configuration (S8000 BTS with CBCF) CA -> Configuration (S8000 BTS with CBCF)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

235

TEST PRESENTATION
This function allows the configuration of one or several CAs.

CAUTION
Working instructions
In standalone mode the DRX is always isolated because the BTS is not supervised by the BSC. In connected mode the DRX is isolated if the "Disconnection" function is applied.

TEST RESULT
The result is presented on the following screen:
Figure 86 Cavities configuration display

This screen contains the following parts:

the menu bar with four main functions: see the "Menu bar" paragraph below the Alarms group with:

the Power Supply alarm the Tuning Detect alarm the three levels of the VSWR meter status
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

236

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

The Clear button is used to erase the VSWR alarms (the TIL records these alarms).

the cavity characteristics panel

the state of the physical CA position: PARKED TUNED UNKNOWN the value of DCS channel band: from 512 to 885 the state of the optocoupler and the motor: green box if the status
is OK, red if the status is NOK. The box also contains some information on the state of the CA.

the CA state selection button:

default value: the box is empty TUNE PARK


Select GO to validate the choice for one CA. Select Go ALL button to validate the choice for all the CAs in two cases:

Park/Tune one by one: a message is sent for each CA Park/Tune simultaneously: only one message is sent to the CC8

the DRX control panel: see the "DRX control panel" paragraph below

Menu bar

Four functions with pop-up menus are available:

"CC8 commands" menu with sub-menus:

markings check opto/motor: to test the hardware components used for a CA


parking

global fine tuning: to send a global tune message to the CC8 to


execute a tuning on all the tuned CAs

warm reset cold reset

"cavity commands" menu with sub-menus:

unitary park/tune global park/tune:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

237

one by one simultaneously

"stop transmission" menu:

all DRXs DRXx (x: 0 to 7)

"close" menu

DRX control panel

When the DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3:

is isolated, the DRX control panel allows the modification of the transmission parameters when a CA must be tuned. is not isolated, the present configuration of the DRX is displayed in the DRX control panel.

The following transmission parameters can be modified:

the number of the DRX to link to the CA the channel value (or the slide bar associated): between 512 and 885 the power decimal value (or the slide bar associated): between 31 and 44 dBm the "Stop Trans." button used to stop the emission of the DRX the box associated with the DRX status:

white: the DRX is not connected or not present yellow: the DRX status is OK red: the DRX status is NOK orange: the DRX is isolated (only in connected mode)
Select "Stop All" to stop the transmission for all the DRXs.

3.5.40 Display the CC8 markings


Menu: Connected and standalone modes Functions -> Marking (S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002BTS, S8000 BTS with CSWM)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

238

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST PRESENTATION
This function summarizes the markings of the S2000H/L and S8000BTS equipment:

the PROM marking of the following devices:

PCMI: SPCMI or CPCMI DSC SYNC ALCO or RECAL CC8

the startup software version of active and passive CSWMs for the active CSWM (in connected mode only):

the Load marking the DLU marking


These markings are also accessible separately by using the menus associated with the types of boards or by clicking on the graphic symbol of the board to be examined.

TEST RESULT
The result is presented on several screens. The >> and << buttons switch from one screen to the other. The result generally comprises four fields:

the object name the load name the software version and release the date and time (sometimes omitted)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

Mrq.res.

Click Cancel to returns to the TIL COAM main screen.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

239

3.5.41 Display the CLK status


Menu: Connected and standalone mode Functions -> Available synchronization sources

TEST PRESENTATION
This function provides information on the availability and character of an external time source used for network synchronization. In addition, this information may be obtained by right clicking the CLK button Available Synchronization sources. Network synchronization is available for:

BTS 6000 BTS 18000 S12000 CBCF (phase 2) S8000 CBCF (phase 2)

TEST RESULT
There are three possible states:

No External Synchronization Master BTS synchronization available GPS Synchronization Available

The state depends on the status of the card present. For instance, in the case of a phase 1 card, network synchronization is not supported. The state that displays for this case is no external synchronization source. If however, the case involves a phase 2 card, or any network synchronization support card then the message might be either of the other two states shown above depending on the setup.

3.5.42 Battery Remote Maintenance and Status Monitoring


Menu: Standalone mode Functions -> Switch battery on/off -> BRC Monitoring

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

240

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST PRESENTATION CAUTION


GSM-R specific
The Battery Remote Maintenance and Status Monitoring are features specific to GSM-R applications. They appear in the "Functions" menu only if the BRC module is present in the power supply rack of the BTS cabinet.

The "Battery Remote Maintenance" feature allows you to switch on and off the battery backup.

ATTENTION
This feature is not available when the TIL is used in connected mode.

If the TIL is used in the stand alone mode, all commands from the TIL are allowed. If the TIL is used in connected mode, the command to switch ON/OFF the battery is not allowed from the TIL. It is only allowed from the OMC-R. The "Battery Status Monitoring" function allows you to get the operational state of the battery strings in order to prevent the batteries backup failure.

ATTENTION
This function is available only for BTS outdoor equipped with BRC.

PROCEDURE
Open the menu Functions and click Switch battery on/off, as shown below:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

241

Open the menu Functions and click BRC Monitoring, as shown below:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

242

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

The BRC monitoring screen encompasses the following panels:

Power source (mains or battery) Battery remote command (switch power mode according to current state) Battery/Mains notification (power supply current notification) Battery discharge report (soak tests) String voltage monitoring (display of current string voltages and modification of thresholds) : voltage values are refreshed only on periodic timer expiration, and not on the reception of an event or a state change of the BRC. Periodic timer cannot be set to less than 20 seconds, since a voltage value is available every 20 seconds at the BTS level.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.5 Available functions in connected and standalone modes

243

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

244

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

3.5.43 Display a global inventory


Menu: Connected and standalone modes Functions -> Inventory (BTS 18000/6000)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

245

TEST PRESENTATION
This function displays an inventory of the following modules:

Digital modules RM/MRM modules Combiner modules Other modules (such as rectifiers)

TEST RESULT
The test displays the following information for each module:

module type

Module type can be IFM, ICM, SPM, ABM, RM, combiners (includes all combiners connected through the RICO: DDM, TxF, DLNA etc), cooling system (includes ECU or SICS), DDU, CCU, rectifiers

module name cabinet slot

The slot is not the number of the physical slot, it is a number incremented within a particular module type. For example, the slot for RM in a BTS 18000/6000 cabinet can take the values 0 to 5.

PEC code serial number hardware release manufacturing date

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

Inventory.res.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only


The functions used for local maintenance of the S2000H/L, S8002, S8003, S8006 and S8000BTS (CBCF and CSWM), S12000, BTS 18000 and BTS 6000 in connected mode are described in Table 4-3:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

246

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 4 Available functions in connected mode only S8000 BTS with CB CF and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 18000 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS with CSWM

S2000 H/L BTS

Paragraph

SYNC Disconnection 3.6.1 Disconn ect the SYNC board (page 247) 3.6.2 Connect the SYNC board (page 248)

Connection DRX(eD RX) Disconnection

3.6.3 Disconn ect a DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/DRX ND3 (page 248) 3.6.4 Connect a DRX/eDRX/eD RX2/DRX ND3 (page 248) 3.6.5 Display the SPU state of a DRX/eDRX/eD RX2/DRX ND3 (page 249)

Connection

SPU supervi -sion DRX (e DRX2) Disconnection

3.6.3 Disconn ect a DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/DRX ND3 (page 248) 3.6.4 Connect a DRX/eDRX/eD RX2/DRX ND3 (page 248)

Connect ion

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

247

Table 4 Available functions in connected mode only (contd.) S8000 BTS with CB CF and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 18000 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS with CSWM

S2000 H/L BTS

Paragraph

SPU supervi sion TDMA Disconnection Connection SPU supervi -sion X

3.6.5 Display the SPU state of a DRX/eDRX/eD RX2/DRX ND3 (page 249)

3.6.6 Disconnec t a TDMA board (page 252) 3.6.7 Connect a TDMA board (page 252) 3.6.8 Display the SPU state of a TDMA board (page 253) 3.6.9 Display Radio Configurat ion (page 255)

3.6.1 Disconnect the SYNC board


Menu: Connected mode SYNC -> Disconnection (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to disconnect the chosen SYNC board for maintenance needs, to avoid losing GSM Time.

TEST RESULT
The SYNC board is disconnected. The "SYNC Connection" function is accessible.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

248

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

ATTENTION
If the Master SYNC board is selected to be disconnected, the CSWM board defines another SYNC board as the master one, before disconnecting the current Master SYNC board. If the Slave SYNC board is selected to the disconnected, this SYNC board is not defined to support the GSM Time until the board is reconnected.

When the SYNC board is disconnected, it can be physically unplugged and the new board can be plugged in. The CSWM automatically connects the new SYNC board.

3.6.2 Connect the SYNC board


Menu: Connected mode SYNC -> Connection (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function enables the chosen SYNC board to be connected.

ATTENTION
This operation is used only when a SYNC board has been disconnected.

TEST RESULT
The SYNC board is connected. The "SYNC -> BISTs" and "SYNC -> Marking" functions are accessible.

3.6.3 Disconnect a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3


Menu: Connected mode DRX -> Disconnection

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to disconnect the chosen DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3.

TEST RESULT
The DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 is disconnected. The "Connection" function is accessible (the menu is no longer shaded gray).

ATTENTION
Do not lock the transceiverEquipment object at the OMC-R in connected mode.

3.6.4 Connect a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3


Menu: Connected mode DRX -> Connection

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

249

TEST PRESENTATION
This function enables the chosen DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 to be connected.

TEST RESULT
The DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 is connected. The "Disconnection", "BISTs", "Alarms", "Status", and "SPU supervision" functions are accessible (the menus are no longer shaded gray).

ATTENTION
The "SPU supervision" is available only in connected mode.

3.6.5 Display the SPU state of a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3


Menu: Connected mode DRX -> SPU supervision

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the states of the SPU of one DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3. You can also obtain additional information on a given SPU. Information is divided into two results windows. The first window provides information for all the Time Slots (TS0 to TS7). It is called the multi-Time Slot window. The Detail button is used to switch to the second window. The second window provides information for a specific Time Slot. It is called the mono Time Slot window. Click Close to return to the multi-Time Slot window. Click the >> and << arrows to display the rest of the mono Time-Slot windows. Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen. The following data is displayed in the multi-time slot window:

the Time Slot number the SPU number the state of each SPU The various values are as follows:

trapped downloaded initialized


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

250

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

cell configured activated

When the SPU is activated, the types of logical channels supported are specified. The following are the values for a DRX:

0x01: TCH + SACCH 0x02: SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8 0x03: BCCH + CCCH (+ SCH + FCCH) 0x04: BCCH + CCCH (+SCH + FCCH) + SACCH_4 + SDCCH_4 0x05: SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8 + CBCH using SDCCH/2 0x06: BCCH + CCCH (+ SCH + FCCH) + SACCH_4 + SDCCH_4
+ CBCH using SDCCH/2 In addition to the above six values, the following value is possible for eDRX:

0x07: PDATCH + PTCCH

activation of the sub-channels (Bit Map Act) Two groups of eight bits give the status (0: not activated, 1: activated) of the sub-channels. The left group is for TCH or SDCCH mode, the right group is for SACCH mode.

the cell identity (BSIC) for the Time Slots activated in TCH (ns: not significant, otherwise):

the measured reception level for the current cell (RxLev) the received signal quality measured on the TDMA (RxQual) the signal to noise ratio (snr)
The following additional information is produced by this function for a given Time Slot:

all the information mentioned above the frequency of the cell BCCH (BCCH freq.) the transmit power of the cell BCCH (BCCH power) whether DTX is used or not the number of frequencies used for each frequency used, the value of this frequency (fx where x is between 1 and 8) for each sub-channel (schx where x is between 1 and 8):

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

251

its state (Act., NA: normal activation, HO: handover) the transmission advance (T adv) the message counter state sent by the mobile in order to maintain
communication (Rad.link c)

the offset frequency (Fr.off) the power relative to the maximum authorized power on the
frequencies other than the BCCH frequency (BS power)

the teaching sequence code (TSC) the activation status of ciphering and de-ciphering the BS power the measured reception level of the current cell (RxLev) the received signal quality measured on the TDMA (RxQual) the signal to noise ratio (SNR) PROCEDURE
To get information on SPU states, do the following:

Run the RM -> SPU supervision menu. The multi-Time Slot window is displayed, providing information for all the Time Slots. To get additional information for a given Time Slot, click the Detail button. The mono Time Slot window is displayed, providing information for the Time Slot selected. The >> and << buttons switch from one TS to the other. Click Close to return to the multi Time Slot window. Click Close on the Time Slot window to return to the TIL COAM screen.

INTERPRETATION OF RXQUAL AND RXLEV VALUES


The values are measured in full mode. Two parameters are used to measure the reception quality of the signal in uplink communication:

Signal quality: RxQual Reception level: RxLev

The reception level is given between 0 and 63.


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

252

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Conversion of RxLev to dBm The conversion of the RxLev into dBm uses the following formula: Rec_Lev in dBm=RxLev-110 Interpretation of RxQual 0 and 7. The RxQual level can take a value between

The BER (Bit Error Rate) level is evaluated as follows:


RXQUAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BER less than 0.2% 0.2% to 0.4% 0.4% to 0.8% 0.8% to 1.6% 1.6% to 3.2% 3.2% to 6.4% 6.4% to 12.8% greater than 12.8% Average 0.14% 0.28% 0.57% 1.13% 2.26% 4.53% 9.05% 18.1%

A value lower than 3 must be obtained for correct communication quality.

3.6.6 Disconnect a TDMA board


Menu: Connected mode TDMA -> Disconnection

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to disconnect the chosen TDMA

TEST RESULT
The TDMA is disconnected. The "Connection" function is accessible (the menu is no longer shaded gray).

3.6.7 Connect a TDMA board


Menu: Connected mode TDMA -> Connection

TEST PRESENTATION
This function enables the chosen TDMA to be connected.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

253

TEST RESULT
The TDMA is connected. The "Disconnection" and "SPU supervision" functions are accessible (the menu is no longer shaded gray).

ATTENTION
The "SPU supervision" is available only in connected mode.

3.6.8 Display the SPU state of a TDMA board


Menu: Connected mode TDMA -> SPU supervision

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to display the states of the SPU of one RM/TDMA board. You can also obtain additional information on a given SPU. Information is divided into two results windows. The first window provides information for all the Time Slots (TSO to TS7). It is call the multi-Time Slot window. The "Detail" button is used to switch to the second window. The second window provides information for a specific Time Slot. It is called the mono Time Slot window. Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen. The following data is displayed in the mutli-time slot window:

the Time Slot number the SPU number the state of each SPU. The various values are as follows:

trapped downloaded initialized cell configured activated

When the SPU is activated, the types of logical channels supported are specified:

BCCH + CCCH BCCH + CCCH +SDCCH SDSSH + SACCH + SDCCH + CBCH

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

254

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

activation of the sub-channels (Bit Map Act) Two groups of eight bits give the status (0: not activated) of the sub-channels. The left group is for TCH or SDCCH mode, the right group is for SACCH mode.

for the Time Slots activated in TCH (ns: not significant, otherwise): the measured reception level for the current cell (RxLev) the received signal quality measured on the TDMA (RxQual) the signal noise ratio (snr)

The following additional information is produced by this function for a given Time Slot:

all the information mentioned above the frequency of the cell BCCH (BCCH freq.) whether DTX is used or not for each sub-channel (schx where x is between 1 and 8):

its state (Act., NA: normal activation, HO: handover) the transmission advance (T adv) the message counter state sent by the mobile in order to maintain
communication (Rad.link c)

the offset frequency (Fr.off) the power relative to the maximum authorized power on the
frequencies other than the BCCH frequency (BS power)

the teaching sequence code (TSC) the activation status of ciphering and de-ciphering the measured reception level of the current cell (RxLev) the received signal quality measured on the TDMA (RxQual) the signal to noise ratio (SNR) PROCEDURE
To get information on SPU start, do the following:

Run the "RM->SPU supervision" menu. The multi-Time Slot window is displayed, providing information for all the Time Slots. To get additional information for a given Time Slot, click the "Detail" button.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

255

The mono Time Slot window is displayed, providing information for the Time Slot selected. The ">>" and "<<" buttons switch from one TS to the other. Click "Close" to return to the multi Time Slot window. Click "Close" on the Time Slot window to return to the TIL COAM screen.

INTERPRETATION OF RXQUAL AND RXLEV VALUES


The values are measured in full mode. Two parameters are used to measure the reception quality of the signal in uplink communication:

Signal quality: RxQual Reception level: RxLev

Conversion of RxLev to dBm The conversion of the RxLev into dBm uses the following formula: Rec_Lev in dBm=RxLev-110 Interpretation of RxQual 0 and 7. The RxQual level can take a value between

The BER (Bit Error Rate) level is evaluated as follows:


RXQUAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BER less than 0.2% 0.2% to 0.4% 0.4% to 0.8% 0.8% to 1.6% 1.6% to 3.2% 3.2% to 6.4% 6.4% to 12.8% greater than 12.8% Average 0.14% 0.28% 0.57% 1.13% 2.26% 4.53% 9.05% 18.1%

A value lower than 3 must be obtained for correct communication quality.

3.6.9 Display Radio Conguration


Menu: Connected mode Functions -> Display radio configuration

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

256

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST PRESENTATION
This function, available only in connected mode, is used to obtain a graphical display of some Radio Configuration details of a BTS 18000 or a BTS 6000. It enables users who are on a BTS site, but do not have access to an OMC-R, to get a graphical display of the Radio Configuration of a BTS 18000 or a BTS 6000. The feature has been designed to have no adverse impact on the performance of the BTS 18000 or BTS 6000. Consequently, there is no automatic mechanism to retrieve and re-display dynamic information since such a mechanism involves periodic polling which could have an adverse impact on performance. Instead, the user has a manual refresh option to request that the display be updated. The information displayed includes:

Configuration Reference (DLU) of the BTS 18000/6000 number of configured sectors sector wise configuration of RM/TDMA and the TDMA that carries the BCCH

RESULT PRESENTATION Configuration Reference TIL displays the name and description of the Configuration Reference (DLU) that is being used by the BTS 18000/6000. An example of this is: N21--BTS 18000 outdoor, 3C666/666/666, RM mixed (S111/O3), H2. see Figure 87 "TIL MMI main cabinet" (page 258). The description of the Configuration Reference is the maximal configuration that could be supported by the corresponding DLU. This description does not take account of a depopulated configuration, or a partially configured configuration (for example an S666/666/666 configured as an S666/444). However, the actual configuration could be deduced from the graphical display of the sector-wise TDMA distribution. If an incorrect Alarm Configuration file is selected or if no Alarm Configuration file is selected, TIL is not able to consistently or correctly display ABM alarms until the correct Alarm Configuration file is chosen. Sector-wise TDMA distribution TIL displays the mapping between each configured sector and its associated TDMA. The sector ID displayed is that defined by the OMC--Rconfiguration. see Figure 87 "TIL MMI main cabinet" (page 258)

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.6 Available functions in connected mode only

257

Sectors can span across cabinets and TIL displays only one cabinet for each screen. To deal with this, TIL indicates on the main screen all the cabinets in which a sector is present. The TIL application automatically detects the sector configuration details at start-up. However, since sectors are dynamically configurable, the user has a mechanism to refresh this information at any time. The graphical representation is then updated according to this information. Since during start--up in connected mode TIL automatically exchanges information with the BTS 18000/6000 it is mandatory that the TIL be connected to the BTS 18000/6000 only after cell configuration. The graphical representation in TIL reflects the display at the OMC-R. This implies that TIL is not able to detect any inconsistency between the DLU used and the actual/physical cabling of the equipment in the BTS 18000/6000. The actual/physical cabling needs to be checked using the cabling reference document (this document can be stored on the same PC as the TIL). To achieve consistency of the display at the OMC-R and in the TIL, it is important that no administrative operations (such as lock/unlock of the Cell or TRX) be performed while the TIL is connected to the BTS 18000/6000. It is not possible to guarantee synchronization of the display between the OMC-R and the TIL. However, the user is always able to view the updated sector configurations by using the refresh option. Since the TIL display is driven by the actual configuration of the BTS1800, the TIL is not able to display any sector related information for TDMA that is present in the cabinet but not yet configured, or if RM modules are dynamically plugged into the BTS 18000/6000. Identifying the BCCH carrying TDMA TIL graphically identifies the BCCH carrying TDMA for each sector. see Figure 87 "TIL MMI main cabinet" (page 258). The choice of BCCH carrying TDMA is configurable and is also subject to dynamic re--allocations triggered by BSC Defense mechanisms. Consequently, the user has a refresh option to display the updated information. TIL during start--up automatically seeks the BCCH related information from the BTS 18000/6000. The relevancy of the initial display is subject to the corresponding TDMA configurations having been completed for the TRX prior to the initiation of the TIL connection.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

258

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Display of the dynamic changes in BCCH allocation are not reflected automatically on the TIL. The user must perform a manual refresh.
Figure 87 TIL MMI main cabinet

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

259

Figure 88 TIL MMI extension cabinet

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only


The functions used for local maintenance of the S2000H/L, S8002, S8003, S8006, S8000BTS (CBCF and CSWM), S12000, BTS 18000 and BTS 6000 in standalone mode are described in Table 5 "Available functions in standalone mode only" (page 259).
Table 5 Available functions in standalone mode only S8000 BTS with CBCF and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 18000 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS with CSWM

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

SBCF/CMCF
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

260

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 5 Available functions in standalone mode only (contd.) S8000 BTS with CBCF and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 18000 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS with CSWM

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

I and C configura tion

3.7.1 C onfigure the BTS parameters (page 262)

DSC 3.7.2 Test the DSC boards (page 263) 3.7.3 Re start the DSC board (page 264)

DSC test

Reset

SYNC 3.7.4 Resta rt the SYNC board (page 264)

Reset

GTW 3.7.5 Re start the GTW board (page 264)

Reset

PCMI/CPCMI/SP CMI 3.7.6 Test the external PCM loopb ack (page 265) 3.7.7 Res tart a PCM interface board (page 265)

External PCM test

Reset

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

261

Table 5 Available functions in standalone mode only (contd.) S8000 BTS with CBCF and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 18000 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS with CSWM

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

ALCO/RECAL 3.7.8 Resta rt a RECAL or ALCO board (page 265)

Reset

DRX (eDRX) 3.7.9 Test PCM of one DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 266) 3.7.10 Reset a DR X/eDRX/e DRX2/DRX ND3 (page 266)

PCM test

Reset

DRX (eDRX2) 3.7.9 Test PCM of one DRX/eDR X/eDRX2/ DRX ND3 (page 266)

PCM test

Reset

3.7.10 Reset a DR X/eDRX/e DRX2/DRX ND3 (page 266)

ICM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

262

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Table 5 Available functions in standalone mode only (contd.) S8000 BTS with CBCF and S8003 BTS S8002 BTS and S8006 BTS

BTS 18000 BTS 6000

S12000 BTS

S8000 BTS with CSWM

S2000 H/L BT S

Paragraph

External PCM test

3.7.17 Stop the PA (ePA) tran smission (page 271) 3.7.11 Test the external PCM loop back of an ICM board (page 267) 3.7.18 Loopback PCM (page 271)

Test the external PCM loopback of an ICM board

ABM

Reset

RM/MRM 3.7.19 Test the external PCM (page 271)

Reset

3.7.1 Congure the BTS parameters


Menu: Standalone mode SBCF -> I and C configuration (S2000 H/L BTS)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to configure the parameters of the BTS.

ATTENTION
The operator must consult the I and C configuration display in order to be aware the configuration of the BTS. See 3.5.3 Display the I and C configuration (page 193).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

263

TEST RESULT
The operator may modify the following parameters:

TEI number using PCM0 using PCM1 first commissioning flag frames type PCM T1 (for S2000H) distance board-plug box for (PCM T1 only) VGA values (for S2000H BTS) using CRC4 (for S2000L BTS)

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

CONF_IC.res

Click Close to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.7.2 Test the DSC boards


Menu: Standalone mode DSC -> DSC test (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
In standalone mode, the TIL COAM itself configures the switching matrix and then triggers the DSC external test for each DSC and finally displays the result. This test is also accessible with the command:
"Functions -> DSC test".

TEST RESULT
All the results for all the lines of all the DSC boards are accessible from the same screen. On the left, a pull-down list is used to select a DSC board (DSC n0 to DSC n3). On the right, a scrollable window shows the test result on each of the lines of this DSC (Line n0 to Line n14). If one board is absent, "ABSENT" appears on the relevant line.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

264

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Click Save to save the result to a file. Results are stored in the following file:

TEST_DSC.res

Click Cancel to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.7.3 Restart the DSC board


Menu: Standalone mode DSC -> Reset (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to restart the DSC board.

TIL for all BTS


All of these TILs operate in the Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Vista environment (TIL DCU4 is not compatible with Windows XP). These tools require the following configuration, in addition to the configuration requirements given above:

Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Vista operating system Microsoft 32 bits TCP/IP driver (Ref: 261-050-020A)

The installation of the Windows program group necessary to launch TIL is done during TILs installation.

3.7.4 Restart the SYNC board


Menu: Standalone mode SYNC -> Reset (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to restart the SYNC board.

TEST RESULT
The SYNC board is restarted.

3.7.5 Restart the GTW board


Menu: Standalone mode GTW -> Reset (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to restart the GTW board.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

265

TEST RESULT
The GTW board is restarted.

3.7.6 Test the external PCM loopback


Menu: Standalone mode SPCMI -> External PCM test (S2000 H/L BTS) PCMI -> External PCM test (S8000 BTS with CSWM) CPCMI -> External PCM test (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to test the external loopback of each PCM.

PROCEDURE
Plug a jumper on the PCM0 and the PCM1. A dialog box asks him to confirm the operation.

TEST RESULT
A dialog box shows the result of the PCM test on the external PCM0 and the external PCM1.

3.7.7 Restart a PCM interface board


Menu: Standalone mode CPCMI -> Reset (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) PCMI -> Reset (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to restart the CPCMI or PCMI board.

TEST RESULT
The CPCMI or PCMI board is restarted.

3.7.8 Restart a RECAL or ALCO board


Menu: Standalone mode RECAL -> Reset (S12000 BTS, S8000 BTS with CBCF, S8002 BTS, S8003 BTS, S8006 BTS) ALCO -> Reset (S8000 BTS with CSWM)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to restart the RECAL or ALCO board.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

266

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST RESULT
The RECAL or ALCO board is restarted.

3.7.9 Test PCM of one DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3


Menu: Standalone mode DRX -> PCM test

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to test the PCMs on channels A and B for a chosen DRX, and on channel A for a chosen eDRX or eDRX2.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives for each channel A and B the following information:

synchronization (1 for "OK", 0 for "NOK") low LSB error high LSB error low MSB error high MSB error

If the test is OK the "Test OK" message is displayed. Click "Close" to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.7.10 Reset a DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3


Menu: Standalone mode DRX -> Reset

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to reset the chosen DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3.

TEST RESULT
The DRX/eDRX/eDRX2/DRX ND3 is reset. The colored box below the "DRX" button turns black. The colored rectangle turns green again after a few minutes. The main TIL COAM screen is displayed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

267

3.7.11 Test the external PCM loopback of an ICM board


Menu: Standalone mode ICM -> External PCM test (BTS 18000/6000)

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to test the external loopback of each PCM

PROCEDURE
Plug the special connector onto the IFM board. A dialog box asks him to confirm the operation.

TEST RESULT
A dialog box shows the result of the PCM test on the external PCM0 and the external PCM1.

3.7.12 Reset an ABM board


Menu: Standalone mode ABM -> Reset

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to reset the chosen ABM.

TEST RESULT
The ABM is reset. The colored box below the "ABM" button turns black. The colored rectangle turns green again after a few minutes. The main TIL COAM screen is displayed.

ATTENTION
If you reset an ABM board, you also lose all information about its RM/MRM slave boards.

3.7.13 Reset an RM/MRM board


Menu: Standalone mode RM -> Reset

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to reset the chosen RM/MRM.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

268

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

TEST RESULT
The RM/MRM is reset. The colored box below the "RM" button turns black. The colored rectangle turns green again after a few minutes. The main TIL COAM screen is displayed.

3.7.14 Test PCM of one TDMA


Menu: Standalone mode TDMA -> PCM test

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to test the PCMs on channels A and B for a chosen TDMA.

TEST RESULT
The result window gives for each channel A and B the following information:

synchronization (1 for "OK", 0 for "NOK") low LSB error high LSB error low MSB error high MSB error

If the test is OK the "Test OK" message is displayed. Click "Close" to return to the TIL COAM main screen.

3.7.15 Congure a TX
Menu: Standalone mode PA -> BCCH configuration

TEST PRESENTATION
This test is used to configure a TX for a special test mode in order to check its transmit power in a given channel. This procedure is either used in standalone (BTS not operational), or in connected mode after disconnecting the DRX (see corresponding commands).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

269

ATTENTION
The transmitter output must be correctly loaded (antenna or attenuator and loads) in order to avoid destroying the power amplifier because of an excessively high VSWR.

TEST RESULT
The result confirms the parameters of the TX and the transmission. Once transmission is confirmed, the measurement can be taken.

PROCEDURE
Install the measurement equipment on the transmission channel and ensure that the transmitter is correctly loaded. An example of a bench is presented in Figure 89 "Typical TX test Configuration" (page 269).
Figure 89 Typical TX test Configuration

Switch on once isolated. Run the PA->BCCH configuration menu for the TX to be examined.

Transmit power input Enter the output power value in dBm and hit <cr>.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

270

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

If measuring maximum power, enter number 44. Transmit channel input Enter the value of the selected channel. If measuring the maximum transmit power, we recommend the channel corresponding to the middle of the band (62 for GSM 900, 699 for GSM 1800 and 662 for GSM 1900). Once the data is transmitted to the TX to be configured, a message states that configuration is correct. The TX begins to transmit. Read the value displayed by the measuring instrument. Add the attenuation (depending on the frequency) caused by the measurement and that caused by the internal cables. Check that the final result corresponds to the theoretical value. Stopping transmission Use the "Transmission stop" menu to stop the transmission.

3.7.16 Congure a TX in TCH mode


Menu: Standalone mode PA -> TCH configuration

TEST PRESENTATION
This function is used to configure the TX for TCH mode. This configuration of the TX/PA can be used by other tools.

TEST RESULT
The result confirms the parameters of the TX and the transmission.

PROCEDURE
Switch on, once isolation has been carried out. Run the PA -> TCH Configuration menu for the TX to be examined. Transmit power input Enter the output power value in dBm. If measuring maximum power, enter the number 44. Transmit channel input Enter the value of the channel selected.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

3.7 Available functions in standalone mode only

271

If measuring the maximum transmit power, we recommend the channel corresponding to the middle of the band (62 for GSM 900, 699 for GSM 1800 and 662 for GSM 1900). Once the data are transmitted to the TX to be configured, a message states that configuration is correct.

3.7.17 Stop the PA (ePA) transmission


Menu: Standalone mode PA -> Stop Transmission

TEST PRESENTATION
This function stops the PA (ePA) transmission. When the PA (ePA) is in BCCH configuration, this function allows the transmission to stop.

3.7.18 Loopback PCM


Menu: Standalone mode Functions -> Traffic PCM loopback

TEST PRESENTATION
This function enables a pair (PCM, TS) to be looped back onto itself.

PROCEDURE
Select PCM loopback from the Functions menu. Click Loopback to confirm the modification. Click Cancel to terminate the modification. Clicking Cancel before clicking Loopback prevents confirmation of the modification.

3.7.19 Test the external PCM


Menu: Standalone mode Functions -> External PCM test (S2000H/LBTS)

TEST PRESENTATION
See "External PCM" test 3.7.19 Test the external PCM (page 271)(see 3.7.6 Test the external PCM loopback (page 265)).

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

272

Chapter 3 BTS on-site maintenance: TIL COAM

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

273

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server


4.1 Introduction
The IPM TML web server provides a local maintenance interface to the Internet Protocol module (IPM), and is used only for BTS nodes that use Abis over IP. This interface allows the user of a TML PC to connect to the IPM, run diagnostic tests, and perform commissioning activities. The TML IPM applies to the following BTS:

BTS18000 BTS9000 BTS6000 S8000 family S12000 BTS

The TML IPM supports the following types of IPM: IPM RIPM IPM-USER RIPM-USER

4.1.1 IPM conguration and connection


IPM: The IP module for BTS6000, BTS9000, and BTS 18000 family cabinets is plugged in the IBP or CIBP rack. RIPM: Redundant IP module for BTS6000, BTS9000, and BTS 18000 family cabinets that contains additional components in order to provide hardware redundancy inside the module.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

274

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

IPM-USER: IP module for S8000/S12000 CBCF family is plugged in the cabinet USER rack (outdoor cabinets) or in an external rack (indoor configurations). RIPM-USER: Redundant IP module for BTS 18000 family cabinets that contains additional components in order to provide hardware redundancy inside the module.

4.2 Operating mode


The users can launch the TML tool in two modes: Local mode: the TML server is accessed from a web browser running on a PC connected to the Ethernet debug port of the active IPM. Remote mode: the TML web server is accessed from the IBOS software, which is co-located with the OMC-R. The users can run the TML functions in two modes: Stand-alone mode: if an IPM has not established any connection with both IBOS and IPG. Connected mode: if the IPM has established a connection with IBOS and IPG. Remote access is allowed for connected mode only.

4.2.1 Presentation
The diagram shows launching of TML in local and remote mode.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.2 Operating mode Figure 90 Launch of TML in local/remote mode

275

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

276

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

4.2.1.1 Purpose
The IPMs TML is used by different types of users for different purposes:

During installation of IPM on customer site: setting commissioning parameters For troubleshooting: IPM information display, tests execution, and result display After installation from IBOS (in remote): IPM information display and update of commissioning parameters

4.2.1.2 OAM model


This following figure shows the client/server architecture with a web server running on the IPM card and a web browser on the TML PC displaying the IPM TML graphical user interface.
Figure 91 IPM TML graphical user interface

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.2 Operating mode

277

Unlike the other microprocessor-equipped circuit packs at the BTS, the IPM implements its TML software as a web server. No special software is required in the local maintenance PC except for a web browser, which displays the GUI.

4.2.1.3 IPM/RIPM configuration


TML needs to manage two types of IPMs:

IPM (or IPM_USER): with 1 IPM core RIPM (or RIPM_USER): with 2 IPM cores

Each IPM core has its own web server but TML functions are available only on the active IPM. On the RIPM, an LED on the front of the module indicates which core is active. Commissioning parameters are stored in a non-volatile memory space, which is common to both cores in case of RIPM configuration and are updated by the TML on the active IPM.
Figure 92 Commissioning parameters for active/passive

4.2.1.4 Concurrent accesses to the TML web server


TML web server prohibits concurrent accesses to the update of commissioning parameters and to some tests. It also prohibits problems between remote and local connections in order for Nortel to activate the stand-alone mode if needed.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

278

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Concurrent accesses are not easy to control though a web server. The TML IPM warns the users when concurrent connections are detected and lets the users manage this concurrence rather than limit the accesses risking unexpected blocking situations.

4.2.1.5 Protocols used by TML in local/remote mode


The following figure shows the different protocols used by the TML web server in remote and in local mode.
Figure 93 Protocols used by TML in local/remote mode

4.3 Launching and quitting the IPM TML application


This section contains procedures for starting and stopping IPM TML sessions.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.3 Launching and quitting the IPM TML application

279

4.3.1 Starting an IPM session in stand-alone local mode CAUTION


Service interruption
If the BTS is in service, performing this procedure on an IPM or on a RIPM where the inactive core has service-affecting fault will disconnect this BTS from the BSC. Existing calls will drop and no new calls can be established.

CAUTION
Service interruption (traffic aggregation)
If an IPM is carrying aggregated traffic from another BTS, this procedure will disconnect the dependent BTS from the BSC, causing an outage.

Step 1

Action Enter the URL of the TML web server in the address field of the TML web browser software.
http://<IP-DBF-Active>:4900

2 3 4

Make sure that no connection with IBOS and IPG is possible. Disconnect the Ethernet switch cables if necessary. Reset the IPM if it was connected to the IBOS or IPG. Execute your connection to the TML web server. The TML web server will send a message to inform IPM that it can stop its connection procedure.
--End--

4.3.2 Ending a stand-alone mode


Use the following procedure to end a stand-alone mode of an IPM session. Step 1 2 3 Action Reconnect the Ethernet cables for the connection between IBOS and IPG to be possible again. Reset the IPM. The user must wait for the connection of the IPM with network (IGM or IBOS LED is green) if the user wants to use the TML in local/connected mode.
--End--

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

280

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

The stand-alone local mode is possible only if the user logs on the TML while the IPM is in the following states:

No connection set-up with IBOS (TCP/IPsec) No connection alive with IPG (TCP/IPsec)

If the above conditions are true, the log on the TML (sending message TML_CONNECTION_REQUEST) will prevent the IPM from making any more attempts to connect to the IBOS or IPG. This explains why an IPM reset is needed to return in connected mode.

4.3.3 Starting an IPM TML session in connected local mode


In case of using connected local mode, the user waits for the connection of the IPM with the network (IGM or IBOS LED is green) before connecting to the TML web server. Step 1 2 3 4 Action Connect the Ethernet port of the local maintenance PC to the debug Ethernet port of the active IPM core. Open a web browser on the local maintenance PC. Wait until the IPM is connected to the network (the IGM and IBOS LEDs are green). Enter the URL of the TML web server.
http://<IP-DBG-Active>:4900/
--End--

4.3.4 Starting an IPM TML session in remote mode


The web server is launched from the visited IBOS over IPSec with OSK key, using the following URL: http://<IP-Main-Active>:4900/ <IP-Main-Active> IP address of the active IPM (main port) is known by the IBOS.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.4 IPM hardware commissioning Figure 94 IP addresses and ports used to call the TML web server

281

4.4 IPM hardware commissioning


The IPM TML web server is used during commissioning at the BTS to set the parameters on the IPM that allow the IPM to connect to the IP network and communicate with the IPG at the BSC and the IBOS at the OMC-R. In simple network configurations, the factory-preset values are sufficient to bring the IPM on line, but in other cases additional parameter values are set at the TML before the IPM can connect to the IP network. After the IPM is operational, these parameters can be changed from the TML later, either in remote or local mode.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

282

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

4.4.1 Commissioning principles No commissioning


If the commissioning memory is empty, the IPM uses default values for commissioning parameters. They permit the IPM use in a general case, without any on-site commissioning if E1 PCM is used. They request DHCP and DNS use in the IP network.

Minimum commissioning
When above no commissioning parameters cannot be used, the following list shows the minimum set of parameters that must be commissioned. The IPM is able to connect to an IBOS and to recover other parameters through remote commissioning. If these parameters are not correctly commissioned, the IPM will not be able to connect to any IBOS to get its whole commissioning, the BTS site cannot connect to its BSC, and an on-site local commissioning is mandatory to restart correctly the IPM.

All IPM IP identification parameters All IBOS identification parameters (with at least two IBOS) TOS/DSCP value for IBOS ServiceChannel flow (default value or correct dedicated value)

TML local commissioning


All parameters can be modified on site with local TML. After modification by TML, the new parameters are checked by the IPM software (see 4.4.3 Parameters validity checks (page 283)). If some inconsistency is detected by the IPM software, the request is then refused by the IPM and the IPM software retains the old parameters. If the parameters are correct, they are stored in IPM non-volatile memory. The new parameters are taken into account by the IPM software, differently depending on each parameter: some parameters need IPM restart, some other not (see 4.4.2 Parameters modification management (page 283)). The TML is in charge of requesting the IPM reset just after acknowledgment if necessary. At any IPM restart (even not requested by the TML), the new stored parameters are considered. In case of modification of many parameters, the operator should modify all the parameters before the user resets the IPM. When parameters request resolution with DHCP or DNS servers, the resolution is performed at each IPM start-up (software or hardware start-up).

Remote commissioning
All IP parameters can be modified remotely from OMC-R by remote TML.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.4 IPM hardware commissioning

283

The remote TML behavior and constraints are exactly the same as local TML. The IPM interface and behavior are also exactly the same for remote TML and local TML. Note that some parameters (TOS/DSCP, User priorities and VlanId on main port, user priority and VlanId on aggregation ports) are also useful for IPG. For these parameters, there is no common update. IPM commissioning and IPG provisioning are both done independently and synchronized by the operator.

4.4.2 Parameters modication management


Only aggregation ports parameters can be taken into account without any IPM reset. All other parameters need IPM restart in order to be taken into account. When they are modified by the TML, the IPM stores them in a non-volatile memory (E2PROM). As long as the IPM is not restarted, these new parameters are not taken into account by the IPM software; the IPM software uses RAM stored parameters. The new parameters are considered at next IPM restart. The IPM software recovers the parameters from non volatile memory at each restart. All parameters can be read from (but not modified by) the OMC-R. To modify parameters from a remote location, you must use the IBOS software to connect to the TML web server.

4.4.3 Parameters validity checks


The following checks are performed by IPM before activating new commissioning parameters

If DHCP use is set to NO, then IPM IP address of core A (and core B in case of RIPM), IPM IP subnet mask, and default gateway must be filled with consistent IP address. If IBOS DNS use is set to NO, then IBOS address are filled with consistent IP address. IBOS list length are consistent with the parameter IBOS number. Number of IBOS in the list must span from 1 to 2. Two IBOS at least must be commissioned: one IBOS in the list and home IBOS or two IBOS in the list. If T1 link is configured, Frame format cannot be set to 03 automatic multi frame with "CRC4 that is reserved for E1 link only.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

284

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

4.5 IPM web server functions in stand-alone mode


The following tests are performed for IPM web server functions in stand-alone mode.

4.5.1 Perform PCM loop test TEST PRESENTATION


This test requires usage of the BTS TIL and the TML IPM on a BTS and IPM started in local stand-alone mode and allows checking the PCM links between IPM and ICM.

PROCEDURE
Connecting on IPM-TML in local/stand-alone mode Step 1 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select PCM loop-back test. TML configures the loop back at IPMs FPGA level for all PCM links. 2 3 Click on ACTIVATE loopback. Connect TIL on the BTS in stand-alone mode. See 3.7.18 Loopback PCM (page 271) for instructions on how to set up the loopback test on the BTS side. From BTS-TIL, launch the PCM loop-back test and read the result at TL side. When finished, deactivate loopback at the BTS-TIL and the IPM-TML.
--End--

4 5

4.5.2 Perform Oscillator test TEST PRESENTATION


This test consists in locking the frequency of the IPM local oscillator to the reference injected.

PROCEDURE
Step 1 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select Oscillator mode.
--End--

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.6 IPM web server functions in connected mode

285

TEST RESULT
The TML will launch the test in PCM mode for this. Then the TML will configure the Octal Falc (OF) to use the synchronizing E1. Possible test results

Problem with the synchronizing-E1 link Time out reaching the convergence Convergence of the frequency reached but value outside the tolerated limits Result OK (frequency reached in time and value included in tolerated limits)

This test can be launched in parallel of the PCM Loopback Test. If the result is OK, the TML displays the frequency value reached and stores the result in the FLASH memory (will be used at IPM start).

4.6 IPM web server functions in connected mode


4.6.1 Display commissioning parameters
This section refers to display of commissioned parameters. For more information, see 4.7 IPM commissioning parameters (page 291).

PROCEDURE
From the IPM-TML menu, select Parameters.

4.6.2 Modify commissioning parameters


This section refers to modification of commissioned parameters. For more information, see 4.7 IPM commissioning parameters (page 291).

PROCEDURE
Step 1 2 3 4 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select Parameters. Change parameter values as required. Click on Submit the new values. If the parameter requires a board reset before the new parameter is active, click on Reset Board.
--End--

4.6.3 Display alarm status TEST PRESENTATION


Displaying the hardware alarms status list:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

286

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Alarm name

Equipment type

Cause value

Comment

SYNCHRONIZATION FREQUENCY_ SATURATION IPM/RIPM core NOT LOCKED The DAC limit value has been reached; synchronization is not possible IBOS object IPM.

built-in self tests HIGH_TEMP IPM/RIPM core HIGH_TEMP IPM temperature has reached the threshold defined.

REDUNDANCY PASSIVE_NOT_ PRESENT PASSIVE_LINK RIPM core PASSIVE NOT PRESENT PASSIVE LINK Ethernet switch MAIN_ DISCONNECTED Ethernet switch DISCONNECTED Passive has not been detected by active one. Link with passive core has been lost. Main port is disconnected (this alarm is visible only in local; TML cannot be executed if the main port is disconnected). Aggregation port1 has been configured (port use commissioning parameter set to used) and is disconnected. Aggregation port2 has been configured (port use commissioning parameter set to used) and is disconnected.

RIPM core

AGGREG1_ DISCONNECTED

Ethernet switch

DISCONNECTED

AGGREG2_ DISCONNECTED

Ethernet switch

DISCONNECTED

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.6 IPM web server functions in connected mode

287

PROCEDURE
Step 1 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select Alarms.
--End--

TEST RESULT
The alarm display refreshes periodically to display the current alarm status.

4.6.4 Display core/ambient temperature TEST PRESENTATION


In all modes, local or remote, connected or stand alone, the user can ask to the TML to display the temperature of the core and the ambient temperature.

PROCEDURE
Step 1 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select Temperature.
--End--

TEST RESULT
The display is automatically refreshed on a regular basis.

4.6.5 Display counters


See 4.8 IPM counters (page 301) for reference.

4.6.6 Display marking TEST PRESENTATION


The IPM marking is shown in the following forms:
PL Name PE_IPM_L PE_BISTFPGA PE_DBG_IPM VERSION V18_A1 V18_A1 V18_A1 E02 E01 E04 EDITION Delivery Note CDI121347 CDI121324 CDI121412

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

288

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

PROCEDURE
Step 1 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select Marking.
--End--

TEST RESULT
The TML gets the marking of the PLs of the IPM in either remote or local mode. If applicable, the TML shows the marking for both active and passive core.

4.6.7 Displaying results of built-in self test TEST PRESENTATION


In all modes, the TML can display the status of the built-in self tests on each IPM core:
Active core Global result Return code OK/KO U32 Passive core OK/KO U32

PROCEDURE
Step 1 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select BISTs.
--End--

TEST RESULT
Return code gives the detailed result of the tests performed.

4.6.8 Reset IPM TEST PRESENTATION


In all modes, remote or local, stand-alone or connected, the user can request a reset of the IPM using the TML.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.6 IPM web server functions in connected mode

289

This reset is useful in the following situations:

Update of commissioning parameters sent; cannot be taken into account before an IPM reset Need to commute from stand-alone to connected mode (or the reverse) locally Need to launch some tests on the passive (the passive will become active) in local/RIPM configuration

PROCEDURE CAUTION
Service interruption
The TML can require an IPM reset, but as TML is embedded in the IPM, the reset will have consequences on the TML itself.

Step 1 2 3

Action From the IPM-TML menu, under the Resets heading, select IPM. Select the reset options (cores to reset, option to reset Ethernet switch, option to run built-in self-tests). Click on Reset Board.
--End--

TEST RESULT
The TML requests the following type of reset:
Values used in the reset proposed after commissioning update Reset of both cores No Ethernet switch reset Default values (configurable) in IPM Reset menu Reset of both cores No Ethernet switch reset (This reset is provided by an independent TML function.) Built-in self tests execution

Reset parameters IPM core Ethernet switch reset

Built-in self tests execution

No built-in self tests execution

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

290

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Table 6 Effect of IPM reset on TML connection Configuration at IPM reset request (default parameters used) IPM reset requested in remote (http://<IP-MAIN-Active>:4900/) Consequence on TML TML unavailable during the reset/restart If DHCP is used on IPM, TML must be called with a new URL: http://<new-IP-MAIN-Active>:4900/ RIPM reset requested in remote (http://<IP-MAIN-Active>:4900/) TML unavailable during reset/restart Either DHCP is used or not, the TML URL will change: the ex-passive core is now the active core: http://<new-IP-MAIN-new-Active>:4900/ IPM reset requested in local (http://<IP-DBG-Active>:4900/) TML unavailable during reset/restart The TMLs URL is unchanged. Contacting TML can cause permutation between stand-alone/connected modes. RIPM reset requested in local (http://IP-DBG-Active>:4900/) The TML URL will change: the ex-passive core is now the active core: http://<new-IP-MAIN-new-Active>:4900/ Contacting TML can cause permutation between stand-alone/connected modes.

In some cases, the IP addresses of the active and passive cores are identical. In that case, TML URL will change only in remote mode if the DHCP is used

4.6.9 Reset Ethernet switch


In either remote or local mode, the user can request the reset of the Ethernet switch through the TML. This reset is done without resetting the IPM and so the Ethernet switch will restart with the current commissioned parameters.

CAUTION
IPM Reset Settings
If some Ethernet switch parameters were modified by the commissioning menu, depending on the parameter modified, the user will probably need to reset the entire IPM instead of resetting only the Ethernet switch in order to have them taken into account. See 4.7 IPM commissioning parameters (page 291) for an IPM restart parameter requirements.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.7 IPM commissioning parameters

291

CAUTION
Loss of TML connectivity
In remote mode, an Ethernet switch reset causes the connection between the TML and the IPM to drop.

PROCEDURE
Step 1 2 Action From the IPM-TML menu, under the Resets heading, select Ethernet switch. Click on Reset switch.
--End--

4.6.10 Ping IP address TEST PRESENTATION


The user can request this test in all modes (but the test is particularly useful in connected mode to test the network from the IPM). The TML requests a ping from the IPM to the IP address specified by the user and returns the result of the ping. To enhance ping testing, the TML answers all the routers crossed to reach the IP address.

PROCEDURE
Step 1 2 3 Action From the IPM-TML menu, select Ping. The Ping window opens. Enter the IP address of a computer or other IP-enabled device in the field Host to ping. Click on Ping Host. The results of the ping test appear in the Results box.
--End--

4.7 IPM commissioning parameters


Some parameters are necessary to the IPM for the IP links management. They can be commissioned by TML through a web server available on IPM.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

292

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

The following table describes the IPM parameters that can be set from the TML. For information about modifying the values of IPM parameters, see 4.4 IPM hardware commissioning (page 281).

Table 7 IPM parameter description Parameter IPM IP identification DHCP use YES/NO NO NO Format Default value IPM reset

Indicates if IPM must recover its IP address parameters through DHCP server or if they are commissioned. 00: NO Note: DNS and DHCP support is restricted in V18.0 PC2 release. IPM core A address IP address (numerical address) 0 YES

Mandatory if "DHCP use" = NO Not applicable else. IPM core B address IP address (numerical address) 0 YES

Mandatory if RIPM and "DHCP use" = NO Not applicable else. IPM IP subnet mask IP address (numerical address) 0 YES

Mandatory if "DHCP use" = NO Not applicable else. Default gateway IP address (numerical address) 0 YES

Mandatory if "DHCP use" = NO Not applicable else. First DNS server IP address (numerical address) 0 YES

Mandatory if DHCP use = NO and DNS use = YES Not applicable if DHCP use = YES. Second DNS server IP address (numerical address) 0 YES

Applicable if DHCP use = NO and DNS use = YES, but not mandatory Not applicable if DHCP use = YES. Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.7 IPM commissioning parameters

293

Table 7 IPM parameter description (contd.) Parameter Third DNS server Format IP address (numerical address) 0 Default value IPM reset YES

Applicable if DHCP use = NO and DNS use = YES, but not mandatory Not applicable if DHCP use = YES. IPM Domain name Character name 0 YES

Mandatory if DHCP use = NO and DNS use = YES Not applicable if DHCP use = YES. IBOS identification IBOS DNS use YES/NO NO NO

Indicates if commissioned IBOS addresses (including home IBOS) are names (FQDN requesting DNS access to be resolved) or addresses. 00: NO Note: DNS and DHCP support is restricted in V18.0 PC2 release. Home IBOS IBOS IP address (name or address) "Nortel-IBOS 0" YES

Numeric address IP or name of the home IBOS IBOS NUMBER Numeric 2 YES

Number of commissioned IBOS in the list IBOS list 1 to 2 IBOS IP address (name or address) Nortel -IBOSn where N = 1 to 2 YES

Numeric IP address or name of the IBOS PCM links configuration PCM type E1/T1 00: E1 YES

Type of PCM BTS and BSC 00: E1 01: T1 Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

294

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Table 7 IPM parameter description (contd.) Parameter Frame format Format Default value 00: Single frame (E1)/Extended Super Frame without CRC6 (T1) If E1, frame format can take the following values: 00 = Single frame, 01 = Multi frame with CRC4, 02 = Multi frame without CRC4, 03 = Automatic Multi frame with CRC4 If T1, frame format can take the following values: 00 = Extended super frame without CRC6, 01 = Extended super frame with CRC6, 02 = Super frame Line code 00: HDB3 (E1)/B8ZS (T1) 00 = HDB3 (E1) or B8ZS (T1) 01 = AMI CPU port traffic parameters Port priority 3 bits Priority value VLAN management 1 byte numeric 00 YES 7 YES YES IPM reset YES

Indicates the necessary management of VLAN_tag: 00 = do not manage VLAN_tag 03 = transparent Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.7 IPM commissioning parameters

295

Table 7 IPM parameter description (contd.) Parameter VLAN id Format 16 bits (12 bits useful) Part of VLAN tag: Bits 0-3: set to 0 Bits 4-15: Vlan id For each of the six following flows managed on the CPU port: 1. IPM-IPG ServiceChannel 2. IPM_IPG RTPN 3. IPM-IPG CRPn (reserved for future use: CRPn UpLink) 4. IPM-IBOS ServiceChannel 5. IPM_IBOS FTP 6. Other flows (including remote TML, debug, DHCP, DNS, ARP) The following parameters must be set: TOS/DSCP 1 byte (6 bits useful) Flows 1 and 4: 10 Flows 2 and 3: 46 Flows 5 and 6: 0 TOS bits for DiffServ use 10: Assured forwarding, 46: Expedited forwarding, 0: Best effort, On flow 6, TOS is not significant for ARP flow. Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified. YES Default value IPM reset

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

296

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Table 7 IPM parameter description (contd.) Parameter VLAN user priority Format 16 bits (3 bits useful) Default value Flows 1 and 4: 4 Flows 2 and 3: 6 Flows 5 and 6: 0 Part of VLANtag: Bits 0-2: Priority bits Bits 3-15: set to 0 4: business critical data 6: delay sensitive data 0: best effort First aggregation port traffic parameters Port use Used/not used NO NO IPM reset YES

Indicates if a BTS is connected to aggregation port 1 00: not used 01: used

Port priority

3 bits Priority value

NO

VLAN management

1 byte numeric

00

NO

Indicates the necessary management of a VLAN_tag: 00 = do not manage VLAN_tag 08 = modify Pbit vlan_id form and to the network 0C = modify Pbit+vlan_id from and to the network 0D = modify Pbit to the network only Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.7 IPM commissioning parameters

297

Table 7 IPM parameter description (contd.) Parameter Format Default value IPM reset

0E = modify vlan_id to the network only 0F = modify Pbit+vlan_id to the network only VLAN tag 16 bits Prio: 110 Id: 0 Bits 0-2: Priority bits Bits 3: set to 0 Bits 4-15: Vlan id Second aggregation port traffic parameters Port use Used/not used NO NO NO

Indicates if a BTS is connected to aggregation port 2 00: not used 01: used Port priority 3 bits Priority value VLAN management 1 byte numeric 00 NO 7 NO

Indicates the necessary management of VLAN_tag: 00 = do not manage VLAN_tag 08 = modify vlan_id from the and to the network 0C = modify Pbit+vlan_id from and to the network 0D = modify Pbit to the network only 0E = modify vlan_ud to the network only Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

298

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Table 7 IPM parameter description (contd.) Parameter Format Default value IPM reset

0F = modify Pbit+lan_id to the network only

VLAN tag

16 bits

Priority: 10 Id: 0

NO

Bits 0-2: Priority bits Bits 3: set to 0 Bits 4-15: Vlan id Note: YES in the column IPM reset is mandatory when the specific parameter is modified.

Note that the mixity of domain names and numerical addresses is allowed. If the DNS use flag is set to YES, all IBOS addresses of the list and home IBOS must be names. If it is set to NO, all IBOS addresses of the list and home IBOS must be numeric IP addresses. Default values are flashed at factory.

4.7.1 Parameters control


See 4.4.3 Parameters validity checks (page 283) to be used as a job aid when commissioning the IPM.

4.7.2 IP parameters
The IPM may get its IP parameters by commissioning or dynamically by DHCP request. If DHCP is not used, the following parameters must be commissioned by TML:

(R)IPM core A IP address (R)IPM core B IP address IPM IP subnet mask


Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.7 IPM commissioning parameters

299

Default gateway IPM domain name (mandatory only if DNS is used to recover IBOS IP address, see 4.7.3 IBOS parameters (page 299) for more information) DNS server address (commissioning of at least one DNS server is mandatory when DNS is used to recover IBOS IP address, see 4.7.3 IBOS parameters (page 299) for more information)

If DHCP is used, the parameters above are recovered by DHCP request.

4.7.3 IBOS parameters IBOS parameters commissioning


The IPM connected must be commissioned by the home IBOS and the IBOS parameters. The IPM may get its IBOS IP address directly by commissioning or by DNS dynamically. If the DNS is used, the IPM needs the DNS server IP address and its domain name to be able to send the DNS request. See 4.7.2 IP parameters (page 298) for more information. If the DNS is not used, all the commissioned IBOS, including the home IBOS, must be commissioned by a numerical IP address. If the DNS is used, all the commissioned IBOS, including the home IBOS, must be commissioned by their name (simple name or FQDN name). It is mandatory to commission at least two IBOS: one IBOS in the list and the home IBOS, or just two IBOS in the list (home IBOS commissioning is not mandatory). If the same address is commissioned twice (if the two mandatory IBOS are commissioned with the same IP address or the same name), a confirmation pop-up is displayed. If it is confirmed, the new IBOS parameters are validated. The new IBOS parameters are only taken into account at the next IPM restart. When the IBOS parameters are taken into account at start-up and if only one IBOS has been commissioned (if the same name or the IP address has been set for all the commissioned IBOS, including home IBOS), start of minor fault "only one IBOS is commissioned" is sent to IBOS. Note that the start of fault is not sent when new commissioning is validated at the TML but at the next IPM reset and the corresponding end of fault is never sent to the IBOS: the alarm is cleared at the IPM reset and is not re-sent at the IPM restart if a second IBOS has been commissioned. The start of fault is sent at each IPM restart, as long as a second IBOS has not been commissioned.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

300

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Home IBOS management


At the end of every authentication procedure, the message HomeIBOS is sent by visited IBOS to the IPM. This message provides to the IPM the IP address of its home IBOS. If this IP address does not corresponds to the commissioned home IBOS, the commissioned home IBOS is overwritten with the received home IBOS IP address. In the case the name of the home IBOS has been commissioned, the name is deleted and the following string is displayed at the TML or at the IBOS at commissioning request: "Home IBOS name is not valid or not available; current IP address is "xx.xx.xx.xx". "xx.xx.xx.xx" is the ASCII numerical IP address of the home IBOS. If the received IP address corresponds to the commissioned home IBOS, the commissioned name remains available and is displayed at the TML or at the IBOS at commissioning request. If the numerical IP address of the home IBOS has been commissioned, it is overwritten by the received IP address which is displayed at the TML or at the IBOS at commissioning request. Note that the home IBOS (IP address or name) is always displayed at the TML or at the IBOS at commissioning request even if it has not been commissioned by the operator.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.8 IPM counters

301

4.8 IPM counters


The IPM collects performance information in the form of counters that track the measure IP synchronization, port rates on the Ethernet switch, compression, and the quality of packet traffic. The IPM transmits these counters to the IPG.
Display name Definition IPM rate counters ipIpmCpuPortRateIngr ess Ingress rate (in kbit/s) at the CPU port Egress rate (in kbit/s) at the CPU port ipIpmAggr1PortRateIn gress Ingress rate (in kbit/s) at the aggregation port 1 Egress rate (in kbit/s) at the aggregation port 1 ipIpmAggr2PortRateIn gress Ingress rate (in kbit/s) at the aggregation port 2 Egress rate (in kbit/s) at the aggregation port 2 ipIpmMainPortRateIngr ess ipIpmMainPortRateEgr ess Ingress rate (in kbit/s) at the main port Egress rate in kbit/s) at the main port (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes (U16) 2 bytes Traffic on the port between the IPM CPU and the Ethernet switch, in kbit/s Interface with a local equipment, for example a daisy chained IPM in Nortel BTS. Size Comment

Interface with another local equipment, for example a third party equipment.

Interface with the MAN/WAN network

IP compression counters TBD Dynamic compression rate 1 byte The ratio (0% to 100%) of the sum for all packets of all active RTPN of the number of bits indicating a compressed column over the sum for all packets of all active RTPN of the number of bits present in the compression subhe ader sent during the observation/keep-alive period.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

302

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Display name TBD

Definition Number of uncompre ssed packets due to S.N. ACK being out of window 4 bytes

Size

Comment The figure is the sum of all active RTPN during the current observation period (up to 6 RTPN streams are active).

IP synchronization counters State Synchronization sequencer State Skew error estimation U8 (1 byte) Double precision float (8 bytes) U8 (1 byte) Double precision float (8 bytes) U16 (2 bytes) U8 (1 byte) U32 (4 bytes) U32 (4 bytes) Value range from 0 to 5 Value range = 0 a few ppm: represents (a-1). Value range = 0 (0%) to 100 (100%): represents (a-1). Value range = : represents the frequency correction. Value range = 0 to 16384: represents the DAC value. Value range = 0 (0%) to 100 (100%) Value range = 0 to 4 294 967 295 Value range = 0 to 4 294 967 295

Confidence rate

Frequency_correction

Frequency correction computed New DAC value

DAC_value

Network_delivery_rate Successful period of observation Thermal_Variation_Po Os

Network quality Counts the successive PoOs with satisfying parameters Counts the successive PoOs with unsatisfying parameters due to high thermal variations Counts the successive PoOs with unsatisfying parameters due to high network variations Current DAC value stored in EEPROM

Network_Impairment_ PoO

U32 (4 bytes)

Value range = 0 to 4 294 967 295

EEPROM_DAC_mean _value

U16 (2 bytes)

Value range = 0 to 16384: represents the memorized DAC value

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

4.8 IPM counters

303

Display name DAC_mean_value

Definition Current DAC value from low pass filter Temperature amplitude measured close to the oscillator during latest PoO U16 (2 bytes) U16 (2 bytes)

Size

Comment Value range = 0 to 16384: represents the memorized DAC value Value range = 0 to 65535, each LSB indicating 0.01C

T_amplitude_value

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

304

Chapter 4 BTS on-site maintenance: TML IPM web server

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

305

Appendix A TCP/IP driver installation procedure


A.1 TCP/IP driver installation procedure for Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista
A.1.1 Mandatory Installation Prerequisites

3COM Etherlink board Microsoft Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista installed Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista installation CD-ROM 3Com Etherdisk For the EtherLink III LAN PC Diskette

Knowledge of Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista is mandatory to follow the instructions hereafter. Insert the Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista installation CD-ROM in the CD-ROM player. Remove this CD-ROM before booting the PC.

CAUTION
You must not modify the TML path. The modification of these files can corrupt the running of the TML.

A.1.2 Action
The TCP/IP drivers installation procedure is the following:

1. Start Windows 98/2000/NT/Vista. 2. On the Desk, select the My computer icon. 3. In My computer windows dialog box select Control Panel icon. 4. In the Control Panel dialog box, select the Networks icon. 5. Select the Configuration tab.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

306

Appendix A TCP/IP driver installation procedure

6. In the Configuration tab dialog box, click Add. 7. Select the Protocol choice and then click Add. 8. In the Selection protocol Dialog Box, click Microsoft choice on the
left box.

9. Click Protocol TCP/IP choice on the right box. 10. Click OK. 11. In the Network dialog box, select the TCP/IP choice, click Property. 12. In the TCP/IP property dialog box, select the IP address tab. 13. Fill the IP address fields with the proper values. 14. Enter the following address in the Subnet Mask: 255.255.240.0 15. Click OK to reboot the PC.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

307

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure


B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000
B.1.1 Mandatory prerequisites

Microsoft Windows 2000 installed TIL-RTC Win32 Installed (a c:\Laygo directory is created with 2 folders) c:\Laygo\Bin already contains:

6 .dll files loopback.cfg stack7.cfg wintdrv.exe


c:\Laygo\DRV already contains:

Laygo326.reg and Laygo327.reg Laygo326.vxd and Laygo327.vxd laygont6.ini and laygont7.ini laygont6.sys and laygont7.sys Laygo327.inf

Sealevel RS-422/485 synchronous type II PCMCIA board a LayGo floppy diskette marked: X.21 bis w95 API DLL and KMD PC-ACB-485 (revision x.yza mm/dd/yy) a floppy diskette marked: DOCUMENTATION (revision x.yz mm/dd/yy)

B.1.2 Restrictions
The BIOS parameter called Smart CPU mode on DELL PC has to be disabled.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

308

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure

B.1.3 Procedure 1. From the c:\laygo\drv directory, execute the Laygo326.reg file and the
Laygo327.reg file.

2. Copy the *.vxd files from the c:\laygo\drv directory to the


c:\windows\system directory.

3. Insert the Sealevel RS 422/485 board in a PCMCIA slot. The "The


Wizard searches new drivers for Sealevel System INC PC-ACB-485" message appears. Then, the following screen automatically appears:
Figure 95 Add new hardware Wizard window (1/4)

4. Click the Next button.


A new screen appears named Add new hardware Wizard (2/4).

5. Select "Search for the best driver for your device". 6. Click the Next button. The following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000 Figure 96 Add new hardware Wizard window (3/4)

309

7. Select "Specify a location" and enter C:\Laygo\drv in the corresponding


field.

8. Click the Next button. The following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

310

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure Figure 97 Add new hardware Wizard window (4/4)

9. Click the Finish button. 10. Reboot the computer. 11. From the Start menu, click the Setting/Control panel submenu. The
following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000 Figure 98 Control Panel window

311

12. Double click the PC board (PCMCIA) icon in the Control Panel window.
The following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

312

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure Figure 99 PC Card (PCMCIA) properties window

13. Check that either Socket 1 or Socket 2 shows the "Sealevel PCMCIA
RS-485 Adapter".

14. Go back to the Control Panelwindow and double click the System
icon. Select the Device Manager item. The following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000 Figure 100 System Properties window

313

15. Click the Other Devices icon and select "Sealevel PCMCIA RS-485
Adapter". Then, click the Properties button and select the "Driver" item. The following screen appears:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

314

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure Figure 101 Sealevel PCMCIA RS-485 Adapter properties (Driver) window

16. Verify that the provider and the date are written. Then, select the
Resources item.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000 Figure 102 Sealevel PCMCIA RS-485 Adapter properties (Resource) window

315

17. Verify that the "no conflicts" message is written in the "Conflicting
device list". Now you can verify the detection of the board with the loopback configuration. From the MS-DOS prompt, run the cd c:\laygo\bin command. Then run the wintdrv stack7.cfg loopback.cfg command.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

316

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure Figure 103 MS-DOS prompt window

The following tool window appears:


Figure 104 Closed - WinTdrv window

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000

317

click the Open button. The following screen appears:


Figure 105 Line 0 - WinTdrv window

click the Connect button and then click the Full Duplex button. The following screen indicates that the board is well installed and works in the loopback mode.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

318

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure Figure 106 Line 0 - WinTdrv (Full Duplex) window

Click again on the Full Duplex button to stop the test. click the Disconnect button. click the Close button. Exit the tool. Then you can launch the TIL application by selecting the Start/Program/tml /BTS tools/til rtc Vxxxxxx/TIL BCF as shown below:

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

B.1 LayGo driver installation for Windows 2000 Figure 107 TIL BCF access menu

319

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

320

Appendix B LayGo driver installation procedure

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide 411-9001-051 18.03 22 January 2010
Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Nortel GSM BTS CommissioningTML User Guide


Release: 18.0 PC2 Publication: 411-9001-051 Document revision: 18.03 Document release date: 22 January 2010 Copyright 1998-2010 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved. While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks. Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, and Microsoft Windows Vista are the property of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

To provide feedback or to report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback. www.nortel.com

You might also like